JP2020127466A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine for executing a game on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result includes: performance control means that control a game performance; a display device 41 that is controlled by the performance control means and can display a performance related to a game; and light emitting means (frame decoration device 18, panel decoration device 46) that is controlled by the performance control means capable of emitting light. The performance control means can display character information on the display device 41 as a performance related to the game, and can cause the light emitting means to emit light, and can make the color of character information and the light emission color different in a period in a ready-to-win period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 154

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (patterns, symbols, etc.) displayed on the display device provided in the game area based on the fact that the game ball is won at the start opening provided in the game area (start prize) It is possible to store up to a predetermined number of starting memories that are the right to execute the variable display game that variably displays. Then, the variable display game is executed based on the stored starting memory, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result,
The special variation winning device is opened to enter a special game state. Further, it is possible to display effects of various games on the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-210310 A

However, if the production is always executed in the same execution mode, the production becomes monotonous, and the interest of the game cannot be sufficiently enhanced. An object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, creates a state advantageous to the player.
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
A display device that is controlled by the effect control means and can display effects related to the game,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light under the control of the effect control means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to display character information on the display device as an effect related to the game, and it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light,
In the reach period, the color of the character information is different from that of the light emitting means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a rear component. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a lower movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining operation|movement of a 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view of an upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining operation of an upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining operation of an upper movable accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a central movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of a central movable accessory unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) Rear view. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of a central movable accessory unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) Rear view. It is a front view of a special variation winning device. It is a top view of a special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member, Comprising: (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variation winning device. It is a rear view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a rear wall member, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) Rear view. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a main part. It is the figure seen from the left explaining the operation of the opening-and-closing member unit, and is the (a) closed state and the (b) open state. It is a figure showing an opening-and-closing member, and is a (a) top view and a (b) front view. It is a front view of (a) opening-and-closing member unit, and (b) AA sectional view. It is a bottom view explaining operation|movement of an opening/closing member unit, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of the game sphere in a special variation winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the (a) top view and the (b) right side. It is a figure explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special variation winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure explaining the behavior of the game sphere at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining checksum calculation processing. It is a flow chart explaining initial value random number updating processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flow chart explaining output processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 1. 7 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining the winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check processing. It is a flow chart explaining pay-out busy signal check processing. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining time shortening change frequency update processing. It is the flowchart which explains production mode information check processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a fanfare/interval interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flow chart explaining small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/during-interval processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing transfer setting processing during special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening opening process. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit ending process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process transfer setting process 2. (A) is a flow chart for explaining a small hit fanfare mid-process, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining a small hit mid-process shift setting process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart explaining a small hit operation shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit ending process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process transfer setting process 3. It is the flowchart which explains the production command setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart for explaining the universal figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing usually. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during normal figure change. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the process of changing the public figure, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining a process of setting transition to the general figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing shift setting processing during a normal figure hit. It is a flow chart explaining processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a normal power operation shift setting process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the normal electric ball remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the end process shift setting process per universal map. (A) is a flowchart explaining the end-of-the-universal-drawing process, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the normal-drawing-to-the-normal-process shift setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining magnet irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening signal editing process. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variation production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit type command processing. It is a flow chart explaining count production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare production setting processing. It is the flowchart which explains the round production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining interval effect setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining ending production setting processing. It is the figure which explains the deformation example of the production in the special game state. It is the figure which explains the deformation example of the production in the special game state. It is a flow chart explaining initial operation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the information utilized by the setting of an initial operation. It is the figure which shows the state where each movable production device operates. It is a figure explaining operation at the time of power failure restoration. It is the flowchart which explains production operation permission processing. It is a figure explaining operation at the time of power failure restoration. It is a figure explaining operation at the time of power failure restoration. It is a figure explaining operation at the time of power failure restoration. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the operation corresponding production at the time of power failure restoration. It is a figure which shows an example of an initial operation table. It is a figure which shows an example of an initial operation table. It is a figure explaining an alternative initial operation. It is a flow chart explaining operation substitution processing. It is a figure explaining the update of a numerical value display. It is a figure explaining the update of a numerical value display. It is a flowchart explaining a numerical value display update process. It is a figure explaining the update of a numerical value display. It is a figure explaining the update of a numerical value display. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of character production. It is a flow chart explaining the initial operation processing in the 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining the initial operation processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the initial operation processing in another example of the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the one-shot type|system|group command process in a 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the received command analysis processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining return operation processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the operation range of the movable production device in the 4th modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, on the front frame (main body frame) 12, the game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp, LED, etc. (for example, red). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the contents of the abnormality by voice. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown)
Reservoir plate), upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full. A lower tray (sauce tray) 23 for storing and an operation unit 24 of the ball-striking launcher are provided. Furthermore, the plate 21
At the upper edge portion of the effect button switch 25a for receiving the pressing operation input from the player
An effect button 25 with a built-in is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, a player rotates the operation unit 24 to cause the ball-striking launcher to supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming board 30.
Fire toward the game area 32 on the front side. Further, by the player operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect of the player's operation intervening is displayed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed. The game area 32 is configured by being surrounded by a resin side case 33 and an outer peripheral wall 31 provided at each of four corners of the game board 30. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, there is provided a guide wall 491 which is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guide path 490 for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 having a display device 41 in the substantially center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward of the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game balls from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board production device 44 that produces an effect by playing. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 for providing a starting condition of the universal figure changing display game is provided. The gaming ball that has won the universal figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31). Two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is provided on the lower right of the special variation winning device 38 arranged on the lower right of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 31).

Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) and a second special drawing changing display that give start conditions for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). A winning device 90 is provided which includes a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition of a game (special figure 2 variable display game). The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls, which have flown into the upper inlet 91, to the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distribution member 92 is rotatable about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes depending on the weight of the inflowing game balls, and the first start winning opening 36 on the left side and the second starting winning opening 36 on the right side. The game balls are alternately distributed to the starting winning opening 97. The game ball winning the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31), and the gaming ball winning the second starting winning opening 97 is the starting opening 3 switch 97a.
(See FIG. 31). Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not been won in a winning opening or the like.

Further, on the right side of the center case 40, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the second special figure changing display game is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction in which it tilts to the right and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. This movable member 37b is normally It is almost vertical and holds a closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the ordinary electricity solenoid 37c as a drive device (see FIG. 31) rotates so that the upper end side tilts to the right and normally varies. The game balls can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game balls can easily flow into the winning device 37. The game ball that won the normal variation winning device 37 is the starting opening 2
It is detected by the switch 37a (see FIG. 31). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a front side is covered with a transparent cover and a downflow path 615 that communicates with the upper and lower sides is formed. Run down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 is an inclined surface having an upper surface 617 descending to the left, and the game ball flowing downward is the upper surface 61.
It is received at 7 and guided to the left where the special variation winning device 38 is present. In addition, the guide unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information regarding the special figure variation display game.

This information display device 630 has a first information display section for displaying the number of first starting memories which are execution rights of the first special figure variation display game, and a second starting memory which is execution rights of the second special figure variation display game. A second information display section for displaying the number of Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. The first to third information display units and the display device 41
A fourth information display unit for displaying the decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game by the fourth pattern is provided separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the symbol.

The first information display section and the second information display section are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows in threes. The upper two light emitting members in the right row form a first information display section, and the upper two light emitting members in the left row form a second information display section. Further, the lower one light emitting member in the right row constitutes the third information display section, and the lower one light emitting member in the left row constitutes the fourth information display section.

Each of the first information display section and the second information display section is composed of two light emitting members, but a design is provided around each information display section so that it can be seen that the two light emitting members are related. At a glance, it can be seen that two light emitting members form one information display section. Further, the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each formed of one light emitting member, but the designs around these information display sections are designed to be independent of each other. At a glance, it can be seen that one light emitting member constitutes the information display section. The design around the light emitting member has a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine, and does not impair the aesthetics. Also, the design around the light emitting member is
It is not a sticker or the like but is formed on a member that constitutes the guiding portion 616, so that labor and cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced.

Further, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variation winning device (big winning opening) 38 which can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. Although the details of the configuration of the special variation winning device 38 will be described later, the opening/closing member 990 depends on the result of the special figure variation display game as the auxiliary game.
Converts from a closed state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the opening/closing member 990 withdraws and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. To do. That is, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a special winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening/closing member 990 driven by the special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 31) as a drive device, and is in the special gaming state (first special gaming state). And during the small hit game state (second special game state),
By converting the state where the special winning opening is closed to the state where the special winning opening is opened, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the special winning opening and give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31) is provided inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. ..

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left-side game area (so-called left hitting) to cause the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 of the winning device 90.
, You can aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35, and by launching a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called right-handed), a prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, the ordinary variable prize device 37, and the special variable prize device 38. You can aim for.

On the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the universal figure starting gate 34, which form the special figure variable display game, are won. A collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game as a trigger and various information is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like.
A special display 1 display (first special display fluctuation display section) 51 for the variable display game, a special figure 2 display (second special map change display section) 52 for the special display 2 variable display game, and an LED lamp Various display devices are provided. The various displays include a special figure 1 hold indicator for informing the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold indicator for informing of the number of starting memories of the special figure 2 variable display game. .. In addition, a round display section that displays the number of rounds (the number of times the special variation winning device is opened and closed) at the time of a big hit, a first game state display section that informs whether it is in a time saving state (usually in support of normal electric power, in a specific game state), left A second game state display unit is provided which informs the player of the beating (normal hitting) and the right hitting, which is advantageous to the player (how to hit according to the gaming state). Also, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state display unit, probability state display unit) that displays that the probability state of big hit is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a universal figure variation display game Includes a general-purpose display for general purpose and a general-use hold display for notifying the number of starting memories of the general-purpose variable display game.

In the special figure 1 display device 51, during the change time of the first special figure changing display game, the special figure 1 changing display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure changing display game.

In the special figure 2 display device 52, during the change time of the second special figure changing display game, the special figure 2 changing display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure changing display game.

In the public figure display device, during the change time of the general figure changing display game, the general figure changing display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. And
When the variation time of the universal figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the universal figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the universal figure changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form form identification information (public figure, normal symbol) for displaying the universal figure changing display game.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of first starting memories (first hold number) which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game by turning off, blinking and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the number of the second starting memory (second hold number) which is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game by turning off, blinking and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The public figure hold indicator displays the number of public figure start memories (the number of public figure hold) that is the right to execute the general figure variable display game by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of light emitting units.

The round display unit turns off all the light emitting units when the special game state is not in effect, and makes the lighting mode corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. The first gaming state display unit (time saving state notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), and the time saving state occurs. If so (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), turn on the lamp. The second gaming state display unit (right-handling notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp in a gaming state in which left-handing is more advantageous for the player than right-handing (normal hitting), and is more effective than left-handing. When the player is in a game state in which the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player (when the player is right-handed, the lamp is turned on. The third gaming state display unit turns on the LED when the power is turned on and is in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when not in the high probability state.

Next, details of the game board 30 in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a game board body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front constituent member 600 that constitutes a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40 and the game board. A rear component 700 to which various necessary members are attached.

The front component 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side into an opening 81 formed in the game board body 80 and penetrating in the front and rear. The front component has an annular base member 610, and various members are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 formed through the front and rear of the game board main body 80, and a peripheral wall 611 forming a front portion of an inner peripheral wall in a recessed chamber-like space recessed rearward from the game area 32. The peripheral wall 611 is provided with a plate-shaped brim-shaped mounting portion 612 formed perpendicularly to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end thereof.

Of the mounting portion 612, a portion formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is a portion of the opening 81 when the front component 600 is inserted into the opening 81 formed in the game board body 80 from the front side. The game board main body 80 has a rear surface that abuts on the front surface of the game board main body 80. As a result, the front-rear position of the front component 600 with respect to the game board body 80 is set to a predetermined front-rear position. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 612, and the front component member 600 can be fixed to the game board body 80 by screws. Further, a part of the attachment portion 612 is arranged on the front surface side of the game board body 80 at a position visible to the player, and the front surface thereof is decorated. In addition to the above, the base member 610 is formed with screw holes, screwing portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving the bosses, slits for receiving the ribs, and the like so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Has become.

On the front surface of the base member 610, a stage portion 620 and a warp flow path forming member 614, which will be described later, are provided.
A regulation wall 613 is provided except for the portion where the normal variation winning device 37 is arranged. The restriction wall 613 is forward by an amount corresponding to the front-rear width of the game area 32 (width from the front surface of the game board body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30) of the mounting portion 612. It is supposed to be extended. Therefore, by mounting the front component 600 at a predetermined position of the game board body 80, the restriction wall 613 located on the front side of the mounting portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is the center. The flow into the case 40 is restricted. Accordingly, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured and the stage unit 6
The number of game balls flowing into 20 is limited.

Further, a warp flow that forms a warp flow path that receives a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guides it to the stage portion 620 on the left side portion when viewed from the front surface side of the base member 610. A channel forming member 614 is attached. Warp flow path forming member 614
Is attached to the front surface of the attachment portion 612, and the front and rear width of the game area 32 is larger than the attachment portion 612 (width from the front surface of the game board body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It is designed to extend forward as much as. Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is continuous with the lower end of the restriction wall 613 attached so as to extend forward of the attachment portion 612 on the left side portion when viewed from the front surface side of the base member 610. It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a tubular flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow in a row, and opens toward the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40. It is possible to receive a game ball flowing down in the game area 32. This upstream side end portion forms the inflow port of the warp flow path. Furthermore, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the upstream end to the lower right and then to the rear. Then, the downstream side end portion is opened rearward, and the game ball is guided to the left end portion of the stage portion 620.

The stage part 620 has game balls that can roll back and forth and left and right, and both left and right sides are inclined surfaces that descend toward the center, and the center part that is directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 projects upward, but is lower than the left and right ends. A game ball that has passed through the warp flow path flows into the stage portion 620 and rolls along the left-right direction. Moreover, the game ball that bounced under the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, an inclined surface 621 that descends forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the central portion that projects upward. By this inclined surface 621, the game ball whose downflow force is weakened on the stage portion 620 is guided from the front end of the stage portion 620 to the lower game area 32.

Further, in the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, a groove-shaped flow-down path 622 that extends along the front-rear direction and descends rearward is provided at the apex of the upwardly protruding central portion. Has been formed. This downflow path 622 is a shallow groove, and many game balls roll left and right without fitting in the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow-down path 622 is guided rearward, flows into an inflow port (not shown), and flows into a guide flow path 623 formed below the stage portion 620. Induction channel 623
Is a flow path that descends to the front, and the downstream end is located directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90, and flows into the winning device 90 with a high probability.

Further, on the right side as viewed from the front side of the front component member 600, a universal figure starting gate 34 through which game balls can pass is provided. The general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. Further, below the universal figure starting gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 having a movable member 37b is provided. The game balls that have won the normal variation winning device 37 are guided to the rear of the front component member 600 and flow into a discharge passage (not shown). Further, the normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a starting opening 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a universal solenoid 37c for driving a movable member 37b.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a front side is covered with a transparent cover and a downflow path 615 that communicates with the upper and lower sides is formed. Run down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The upper surface 617 of the guide portion is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the upper surface 617 receives the game ball that flows down the downflow path 615, and guides it to the left. In addition, the guide unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information regarding the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear component member 700 has a rear base member 710 in the shape of a substantially rectangular box having a recess 711 that opens forward, and the rear base member 710 includes screw holes and screws. Stops, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving the bosses, slits for receiving the ribs, etc. are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a brim-shaped fixing portion 713 that extends vertically outward with respect to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component member 700 is provided on the rear surface of the game board body 80 in a predetermined manner. It can be fixed in position. Further, the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 is formed with a through hole 715 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The through hole 715 allows the display surface of the display device 41 mounted behind the rear base member 710 to be visually recognized.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that the image on the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Has been done. The display device 41 is not limited to one including a liquid crystal display device, and may be one including a display such as an EL or CRT, for example.

The lower movable accessory unit 730, the upper movable accessory unit 800, and the central movable accessory that form the board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device that produces an effect by operating inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710. A unit 880 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is arranged below the through hole 715. Figure 5
As shown in FIG. 8, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 that imitate a mausoleum and a second lower movable member 770 that imitates a gourd. The movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are operable to appear on the front side of the display device 41. The lower movable accessory unit 730 includes the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable members 740 and 741.
A first lower base portion 731 arranged on the front side, a second lower base portion 732 arranged on the center, and a rear surface side are arranged as a base portion to which a driving mechanism for operating the lower movable member 770 and various members are attached. A third lower base portion 733 is provided.

The motor 734, which serves as a drive source for driving the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770, has a drive shaft in the front-rear direction at the lower right when viewed from the front side of the third lower base portion 733. It is attached along. The lower movable accessory unit 730 includes first lower movable members 740 and 74.
The first and second lower movable members 770 are provided, but these are driven by one motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is applied to a first gear 735 which is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and a second gear 737 which is engaged with the first gear 735 and is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is used to operate the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and the first gear 735 is provided on the front surface side for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741.
The drive shaft 736 is provided so as to extend forward.

Further, a first light shielding plate 739 is provided on the outer periphery of the first gear 735 so as to extend in the radial direction. The first light shielding plate 739 can be detected by a first detection sensor 781 (illustrated in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the first gear 735. The first detection sensor 781 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. The light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection portion are arranged such that the gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion is at a position on the circumference where the first light shielding plate 739 provided on the first gear 735 moves.

Further, the second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and the second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back surface side. It is provided in. As will be described later, when the motor 734 is driven in a predetermined direction (here, clockwise when viewed from the front side), the first lower movable members 740 and 741 operate by driving force being transmitted via the first drive shaft 736. However, when the second lower movable member 770 drives the motor 734 in the direction opposite to the above-described predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the second drive shaft 738. Is configured to work.

As shown in FIG. 6, one of the first lower movable members 740 is provided with a bearing portion 742 at the lower end portion, and this bearing portion 742 is provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and is provided with a rotation shaft 751 along the front-rear direction. It is rotatably supported by. The bearing portion 742 is a gear and receives the driving force from the motor 734 so that the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751.
Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 also has a bearing portion 743 at the lower end portion.
43 is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 752 provided in the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and extending in the front-rear direction. The bearing 743 is a gear, and receives the driving force from the motor 734 so that the first lower movable member 741 can move around the rotation shaft 752.

The gears of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 pivotally supported by the rotary shaft 751 on the left side when viewed from the front are doubled in the front and rear, and the drive force from the motor 734 is provided by the front gear. I am supposed to receive it. The rear gear is configured to transmit the driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741. One motor 734 drives the two first lower movable members 740, The 741 can operate simultaneously.

The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 that is pivotally supported by the rotating shaft 751 on the left side when viewed from the front is disposed below the bearing portion 742 and is centered on the axis along the front-rear direction. It meshes with a rotatable gear 753. The gear 753 is a slide member 760 provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 so as to be slidable left and right with respect to the second lower base portion 732.
Of the slide member 760 that meshes with the rack gear 761 provided on the upper part of the
The first lower movable member 740, 741 is operated by moving the left and right.

The slide member 760 is a flat plate-like member and is arranged such that the plate surface thereof is along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The sliding member 760 is provided with an oval supported portion 762 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. When 754 is inserted, it is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Further, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760, so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to drop forward.

Further, the slide member 760 is formed with a linear through hole 763 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The through hole 763 includes an arcuate portion and a linear portion that extends downward from the right end of the arcuate portion when viewed from the front side. The first drive shaft 736 provided on the first gear 735 is inserted into the through hole 763 from the rear side, and the drive force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial positions. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at the connecting portion of the arcuate portion and the straight portion of the through hole. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. Then, in the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 are in a state of being aligned forward and backward. In addition, as described above, the first lower movable member 740,
When 741 is in the initial position, the first light shielding plate 739 is retracted from the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the detection result of the first detection sensor 781 is ON (FIGS. 5 and 7A). reference).

From this initial state, when the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side,
The drive shaft 736 moves the linear portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 to the left. As a result, the slide member 760 slides to the left as shown in FIG.
When the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 rotate upward and appear on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is the reverse of the above. As will be described later, the second lower movable member 7 is driven by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state.
70 can be operated. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 763, the slide member 760 is not pressed and the first lower movable member 7 is not pressed.
40 and 741 do not operate. The same applies when returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operating state to the initial state.

In addition, by rotating the first gear 735 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side from the initial state to move the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the initial position, the first light blocking plate 739 causes the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. , And the detection result by the first detection sensor 781 is OFF. The first light-shielding plate 739 causes the first detection sensor 78 to move when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial position.
The first detection sensor 7 is provided in such a range that the state of invading the first detection unit is maintained.
Based on the fact that 81 is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 determines that the first lower movable member 740, 7
It can be understood that 41 is not in the initial position. That is, the first detection sensor 781 serves as position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the first lower movable member 740, 741 which is the movable production device forming the board production device 44, and the first lower movable member 740, 741 has the initial position. The production accessory switch 47 for detecting the presence of

As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 7, the second lower movable member 770 is provided with a rotating shaft 7 at the lower end along the front-rear direction.
71, and the rotation shaft is rotatably supported by the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. Further, in the vicinity of the rotating shaft 771, a linear through hole 77 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed.
2 is formed. The through hole 772 includes an arcuate portion and a straight line portion extending from the left end of the arcuate portion when viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. In this through hole 772, the second
The second drive shaft 738 provided on the gear 737 is inserted from the front, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

A second light shielding plate 773 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft is provided near the rotating shaft 771 and at a position facing the through hole 772 with the rotating shaft 771 interposed therebetween. The second light shielding plate 773 can be detected by a second detection sensor 782 (illustrated in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the second lower movable member 770. The second detection sensor 782 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. The output is provided so that the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the detection unit is located at a position on the circumference where the second light shielding plate 773 provided in the second lower movable member 770 moves.

FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial positions. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at the connecting portion of the arcuate portion and the straight portion of the through hole 772. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. Then, in the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 are aligned in the front-rear direction.

In this state, the first light shielding plate 739 is retracted from the detecting portion of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 is in the ON state. Further, the second light shielding plate 773 is retracted from the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is turned on. Thus, the first detection sensor 7
81 and the second detection sensor 782 are both in the ON state, the effect control device 30
It can be understood that 0 is an initial state in which both the first lower movable members 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are in the initial positions.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so as to rotate the second gear 737 clockwise when viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward, and Move the straight part. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial state, the operation opposite to the above is performed.

Further, when the second lower movable member 770 operates from the initial position, the second light shielding plate 773 enters the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is turned off. The second light shielding plate 773 is provided with the second detection sensor 78 when the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position.
The second detection sensor 7 is provided in such a range that the state of invading the second detection unit is maintained.
Based on the fact that 82 is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position. That is, the operation state of the second lower movable member 770 can be detected based on the detection result of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 can detect the position of the second lower movable member 770 forming the movable effect device. A second position detecting means
The effect accessory switch 47 for detecting that the lower movable member 770 is at the initial position is formed.

Note that when the second lower movable member 770 is operated from the initial position, the first gear 735 is moved to the position shown in FIG.
The state shown in FIG. 7B is obtained by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the state shown in a). First
The light shielding plate 739 is provided in such a range that the state where it does not enter the detecting portion of the first detection sensor 781 is maintained in this process, and the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state.
Of course, in the process of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position, the operation is opposite to this, so the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state.

In addition, as described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, it does not press the second lower movable member 770 and the second lower movable member 770 does not operate. The same applies when returning the first lower movable members 740, 741 from the operating state to the initial state.

As described above, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated from the initial position, the first gear 735 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front side from the state shown in FIG. 7A. As a result, the first light shielding plate 739 enters the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 becomes OF.
It becomes the F state. The first light-shielding plate 739 is provided in such a range that the state where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial position is maintained in the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781. Based on the sensor 781 being in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the first lower movable member 740, 741 is not in the initial position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, when the second lower movable member 770 is rotated upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, an effect display that emphasizes the second lower movable member 770 is performed on the display device 41. It is possible. Of course, the effect display may be similarly performed even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41. The display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member that appears on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are provided in a portion of the second lower movable member 770 that imitates a gourd, so that decoration by light emission can be performed. In addition, the letters "Dearca" also emit light. These four characters are designed to emit light independently,
Regarding "le", the "no" part and the "re" part emit light independently. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B and FIG. 8, it is possible to cause only the “de” portion and the “re” portion of the “le” to emit light and display “dele”. There is. By thus dividing the characters and displaying different information, a novel effect can be performed. It should be noted that the display of "delay" notifies that it is the dere mode, which is one of a plurality of effect modes. By thus notifying the effect mode by the display on the movable member, it is possible to easily inform the player of the effect mode that has been set.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable accessory unit 800 is arranged above and on both sides of the through hole 715. As shown in FIG. 9, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848.
And a second upper movable member 860 simulating a tiger's hand, and these first upper movable member 848, second
The effect is produced by operating the upper movable member 860.

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 8 attached to the rear base member 710.
01 and a movable member unit 820 that is vertically movable with respect to the base member 801 and that includes a first upper movable member 848. The base member 801 is U-shaped when viewed from the front surface side, and includes an upper base portion 802 arranged above the through hole 715 and a left base portion arranged leftward when viewed from the front surface side of the through hole 715. 803 and a right base portion 804 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715.

At the right end of the left base portion 803 and the left end of the right base portion 804, a guide portion 805 extending in the up-down direction is provided. The guide portion 805 guides the movable member unit 820 in the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are respectively provided with a drive mechanism 806 that drives the movable member unit 820 up and down.
Of the drive mechanisms 806 that drive the movable member unit 820 up and down, the drive mechanism 806 that performs the left operation when viewed from the front side is referred to as the movable member unit (left), and the drive mechanism 806 that performs the right operation is moved. It may be referred to as a member unit (right).

Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and the arm is rotated by driving the motor 807. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820, and the link member 830 is operated by driving the motor 807 to move the movable member unit 8.
20 can be driven up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for mounting various members, a first upper movable member 848 disposed on the front side of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A rear surface of the unit base portion 841; a first drive portion (not shown) which is arranged on the back surface side of the portion 841 and drives the first upper movable member, a second drive portion (not shown) which drives the second upper movable member And a guided member 842 that is guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

The link members 830 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and are arranged so as to extend in directions opposite to each other. The link member 830 has a rotating shaft 810 provided on the left base portion 803 and extending forward along the front-rear direction, or a rotating shaft provided on the right base portion 804 extending forward along the front-rear direction. A bearing portion 831 through which 810 is inserted is provided at one end portion, and is rotatably supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804. Further, the link member 830 has a drive shaft 809 provided on the arm of the drive mechanism 806.
A first guide portion 832 that is an elongated hole is formed through which the drive shaft 809 moves along the first guide portion 832 by driving the motor 807 to rotate the arm. Is designed to be rotated up and down.

A third light shielding plate 835 that extends in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided near the bearing portion 831 of the link member 830 that is axially supported by the left base portion 803. This third light shielding plate 835
Can be detected by a third detection sensor 811 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the left base portion 803. The third detection sensor 811 is an optical sensor that includes a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. The light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection unit are provided with a third light-shielding plate 8
35 is arranged so as to be in a position on the circumference of movement.

A fourth light shielding plate 836 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided near the bearing portion 831 of the link member 830 that is axially supported by the right base portion 804. This fourth light shielding plate 836
Can be detected by a fourth detection sensor 812 provided adjacent to the rotating shaft 810 of the right base portion 804. The fourth detection sensor 812 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. The output is provided, and the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion in the detection portion is the fourth light shielding plate 8
It is arranged so that 36 is in the position on the circumference to move.

Further, a connecting shaft for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided at the other end portion of the link member 830 opposite to the one end portion provided with the bearing portion 831 so as to extend rearward. There is. Further, the link member 830 has a second guide portion 834 which is a long hole through which a support shaft provided at one end portion of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of the link member 830 can be inserted. Is formed, and the one end portion of the second upper movable member 860 is guided and supported by the second guide portion 834.

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body portion and a supported portion 845 extending left and right from the main body portion.
With. The supported portion 845 is formed with a third guide portion which is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction, and the connecting shaft of the link member 830 is slidably connected to the third guide portion 846. The unit base portion 841 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the driving of the motor 807. Further, a guided member 842 is attached to the back surface of the unit base portion 841. The guided member 842 is a plate-shaped member that is arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction, and a guided portion that is guided at left and right end portions by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804. 843 is provided.

A circular first upper movable member 848 is provided on the front side of the main body. The first upper movable member 848 is rotatably supported by the main body on a rotation shaft provided in the center of the back surface and extending in the front-rear direction. By rotating the rotation shaft by the first drive unit, It is designed to rotate around the axis of rotation. The first drive unit includes the rotatable first upper movable member 84.
A fifth detection sensor is provided for detecting that 8 is in the initial position.

In addition, the second drive unit provided in the main body can drive the second upper movable member 860 independently of the first upper movable member 848. The second drive unit is the second upper movable member 860.
Is provided with a drive arm 853, and the drive arm 853 can be swung left and right. A second upper movable member 860 is connected to the other end of the drive arm 853, and the second upper movable member 860 is swingable left and right by swinging the drive arm 853 left and right. Further, the second drive unit is provided with an eighth detection sensor that detects that the swingable second upper movable member 860 is at the initial position.

9 to 11 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. Note that some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. FIG. 9 shows an initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is in the initial position at the upper end of the operating range, and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also in the initial position.
Although the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range in FIG. 10, the first upper movable member 848 is shown.
The second upper movable member 860 is in the operating state in the initial position. Further, FIG. 11 shows an operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also operating from the initial position.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 9, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operating range. In this state, the third light shield plate 835 is located at the detection part of the third detection sensor 811, and the fourth light shield plate 836 is located at the detection part of the fourth detection sensor 812, and the third detection sensor 811 is located.
And the fourth detection sensor 812 are both turned off. Further, the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are also turned off. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state to rotate the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm toward the display device 41 side, the link member 830 rotates downward, and the movable member unit 820 moves. Move down. Then, the movable member unit 820
In the operating state in which is at the lower end of the operating range, the drive shaft 809 is located at the lower end in the turning range, and the link member 830 is also located at the lower end in the turning range, as shown in FIG.

Further, in this state, the third light shielding plate 835 retracts from the detection unit of the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth light shielding plate 836 retracts from the detection unit of the fourth detection sensor 812, and the third detection sensor 811 and the third detection sensor 811 All the 4 detection sensors 812 are turned on. Since the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are at the initial positions, both the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are turned off.

That is, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the movable member unit 820 is at the initial position based on that the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are both OFF. Therefore, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 form an effect accessory switch 47 that detects the initial position of the movable member unit 820 that forms the board effect device 44. Also,
The third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 form a position detection unit that can detect the position of the movable member unit 820 that forms the movable effect device.

Note that, here, when the movable member unit 820 is slightly moved from the initial position,
The detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 both remain in the OFF state, but the third sensor
The movable member unit 82 is adjusted by adjusting the range in which the light blocking plate 835 and the fourth light blocking plate 836 are provided.
0 is slightly moved from the initial position and the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812
It is also possible to make all of them ON.

When the first driving unit is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the fifth detection sensor is turned on until it returns to the initial position shown in FIG. The first upper movable member 848 can be driven both clockwise and counterclockwise. When the second drive unit is operated, the second upper movable member 860 is moved toward the first upper movable member 848 side as shown in FIG. Repeatedly move left and right from the separated state. The eighth detection sensor is turned on until it returns to the initial position shown in FIG. That is, the fifth detection sensor serves as position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the first upper movable member 848 which forms the movable effect device, and the effect accessory switch which detects that the first upper movable member 848 is at the initial position. 47
Make up. In addition, the eighth detection sensor forms a position detecting unit that can detect the position of the second upper movable member 860 that forms the movable effect device, and also the effect accessory switch that detects that the second upper movable member 860 is at the initial position. Make 47.

That is, the first upper movable member 848 forms a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 operate the first effect movable body in the first drive mechanism section. And these constitute the first effect device. Further, the second upper movable member 860 constitutes a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive section 850 constitutes a second drive mechanism section for operating the second effect movable body. Constitutes a second effect device.

Further, the second upper movable member 860 is arranged so as to cover and hide the link member 830 at both the initial position shown in FIG. 9 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. 11, and operates with the link member 830 covered. It is like this. By covering the link member 830 with the operating second upper movable member 860, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the link member 830. A higher concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case of covering with a decorative member that does not. Further, particularly in the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 is covered so as to be invisible to the player. As a result, in the state where the player is in the initial position, which occupies most of the game, unnecessary parts cannot be seen by the player, and decorativeness is improved.

From the above, the game-related effects are controlled in the gaming machine 10 which executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game result is the special result. Controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) and the effect control means,
A first effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) and a second effect device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 85) that perform an operation-related effect by operating.
0) and the first effect device (1) capable of performing a predetermined effect operation.
The 1st upper movable member 848) and the 1st drive mechanism part (driving mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating a 1st effect|action movable body, and a 2nd effect|production apparatus performs a predetermined effect|action operation. And a second drive mechanism section (drive section 850) for operating the second effect movable body, and a first drive mechanism section. The second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover it.

Therefore, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism section, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts, and the effect produced by the operating effect device can be enhanced, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. Can be improved. In particular, by covering the first drive mechanism section with the operating second effect movable body, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second effect movable body, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the first drive mechanism section. A higher concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case of simply covering with a decorative member that does not operate.

In addition, the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860) is at least the first effect movable body (first
When the upper movable member 848) is in the initial position, the first drive mechanism unit (link member 830)
Is covered so that it cannot be seen by the player. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts in the initial position occupying most of the game, and the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable accessory unit 880 is disposed so as to surround the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the central movable accessory unit 880 operates so that a plurality of four central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 are combined in front of the display device 41. By doing so, production is performed.

The central movable accessory unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. In addition, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that are disposed and operate on the upper side of the front surface of the movable effect base member 881, and the movable effect base member 8
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, which are disposed on the lower side of the front surface of 81 and operate, are provided.

The movable effect base member 881 is configured such that the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are attached to the center of the portion located on the upper side of the display device 41 in the left-right direction. In this portion, a first rotating shaft 882 that extends forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the first central movable effect member and the operation of the first central movable effect member are guided. A first guide portion 883, which is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, is provided. Also, a second rotation shaft 884 that extends forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the second central movable effect member.
And a second guide portion 885, which is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, for guiding the operation of the second central movable effect member.

A drive source for operating the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 is provided on the right side of the part of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41 when viewed from the front side. An eggplant motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on the rear surface side of the movable effect base member 881 from the first rotating shaft 882 to the motor 886. A drive mechanism is arranged, and a back cover 896 is attached so as to cover the back surface of the drive mechanism.

Further, a sixth detection sensor 889 is provided on the left side of the part of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41 when viewed from the front side. This sixth detection sensor 88
Reference numeral 9 denotes an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined gap, and outputs an ON signal by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. is there. A sixth light-shielding plate 916 that extends rearward is provided on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910 attached to the front side of this portion, and the sixth light-shielding plate and the light-receiving unit of the detection unit of the sixth detection sensor 889 are provided. The gap is arranged at a position on the circumference where the sixth light shielding plate 916 moves.

Further, the movable effect base member 881 is configured such that the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are attached to the center of the portion located below the display device 41 in the left-right direction. In this portion, a third rotating shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the third central movable effect member, and the operation of the third central movable effect member are guided. A third guide portion 892, which is a long hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction, is provided. Further, a fourth rotating shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and a front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the fourth central movable effect member. Fourth long hole that penetrates to
A guide portion 894 is provided. The display device 4 in the movable effect base member 881
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 920 are provided on the left side when viewed from the front side of the portion located on the lower side of 1.
A motor 895 serving as a drive source for operating the central movable effect member 930 is provided.

Further, a seventh detection sensor 897 is provided at the center of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41. The seventh detection sensor 897 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. Is output. On the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920 attached to the front side of this portion, the seventh light shielding plate 92 extending rearward is provided.
6 is provided, and the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion in the detection portion of the seventh detection sensor 897 is arranged so as to be at a position on the circumference where the seventh light shielding plate 926 moves.

The first central movable effect member 900 arranged in the upper right portion includes a decoration portion 901 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the first central movable effect member 900, a first bearing portion 902 that penetrates before and after the first rotating shaft 882 is inserted is provided. It is rotatably supported around a moving shaft 882.

Further, in the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a fan-shaped first fan gear 903 and a second fan gear 904 which are fan-shaped around the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The first fan-shaped gear 903 comes to face the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through a front-back penetrating portion 887 formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881. There is. The rear surface side of the movable effect base member 881 meshes with a gear that transmits the driving force from the motor 886.

Further, the second fan gear 904 is provided so as to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The second fan gear 904 meshes with a third fan gear 913 provided on a second center movable effect member 910 arranged adjacent to the left side of the first center movable effect member 900. As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first fan gear 903 is also transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second fan gear 904. Further, on the back surface of the first central movable effect member 900, a guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 905 is adapted to be inserted into the first guide portion 883, and the first central movable effect member 900.
When is rotated, it is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883, so that the first central movable effect member 900 can smoothly move.

The second central movable effect member 910 arranged in the upper left portion includes a decoration portion 911 that is decorated and appears on the front surface side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the second central movable effect member 910, a second bearing portion 912 that penetrates before and after the second rotating shaft 884 is inserted is provided, and the second central movable effect member 910 is the second time. It is rotatably supported around a moving shaft 884.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a fan-shaped third fan-shaped gear 913 whose center is the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The third sector gear 913 is adapted to mesh with the second sector gear 904 provided on the first central movable effect member 900 arranged adjacent to the right side of the second central movable effect member 910. Further, on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910, a guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 914 is connected to the second guide portion 885.
When the second central movable effect member 910 is rotated, the second central movable effect member 910 moves to the second position.
The second central movable effect member 910 can be smoothly operated by being guided along the extending direction of the guide portion 885.

Further, an engaging portion 915 extending rearward is provided near the second bearing portion 912.
The engaging portion 915 comes to face the back surface side of the movable production base member 881 through a penetrating portion 888 formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 of the movable production base member 881 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. There is. Then, as shown in FIG. 13B, one end of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged with the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked by a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable effect member 910 is biased upward. It is like this.
As a result, the biasing force of the torsion coil spring 889 causes the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 900 to move.
The first movable center production member 900 and the second movable center production member 910 that have moved downward serve as an aid when holding the movable center production member 910 at the initial position, which is the upper end position in the operating range, and return to the initial position. It will be an aid in the case.

As shown in FIG. 12, the third central movable effect member 920 arranged at the lower left portion includes a decoration portion 921 that is decorated and appears on the front surface side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the third central movable effect member 920, a third bearing portion 922 is provided which penetrates before and after the third rotating shaft 891 is inserted, and the third central movable effect member 920 is provided at the third time. It is rotatably supported about a moving shaft 891.

Further, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a fan-shaped fourth fan gear 923 and a fifth fan gear 924 centering on the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided so as to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. This fourth fan gear 923
Is a motor 89 arranged in the lower left part of the third rotating shaft 891 in the movable effect base member 881.
It meshes with the gear of No. 5.

The fifth fan gear 924 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 is adapted to mesh with the sixth sector gear 933 provided on the fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged adjacent to the right side of the third central movable effect member 920. As a result, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is also transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924. Further, on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920, a guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 925 is adapted to be inserted into the third guide portion 892, and the third central movable effect member 920.
When is rotated, it is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892 to enable the smooth operation of the third central movable effect member 920.

The fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged in the lower right portion includes a decoration portion 931 that is decorated and appears on the front surface side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930, a fourth bearing portion 932 that penetrates before and after the fourth rotation shaft 893 is inserted is provided, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is the fourth time. It is rotatably supported about a moving shaft 893.

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth fan gear 933 and a seventh fan gear 934 centering on the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided so as to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 meshes with a fifth sector gear 924 provided on the third central movable effect member 920 arranged adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. Further, a guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930. This guided shaft 9
35 is adapted to be inserted into the fourth guide portion 894, and when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894. 4 The central movable effect member 930 can be smoothly operated.

The seventh fan gear 934 is provided so as to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 is provided with a biasing mechanism 940 arranged at the lower right of the fourth central movable effect member 930.
It meshes with the eighth fan gear 942 provided on the. The biasing mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 along the front-rear direction and includes an eighth fan gear 942. The biasing mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend to the left side from the rotation shaft when viewed from the front side, and is biased downward (counterclockwise direction) by a biasing member (not shown). This allows
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are urged in the direction toward the initial position which is the lower end position in the operation range. Therefore, the urging force of the urging mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 at the initial position, and the third central movable effect member 920 that has moved upward and It assists when the fourth central movable effect member 930 returns to the initial position.

The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above has the same initial state as shown in FIG.
It can be converted into the operation completion state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 13, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are at the initial position which is the upper end of the operation range,
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial position which is the lower end of the operation range, and are in a state of being retracted from the front surface of the display device 41.

In this initial state, the sixth light shielding plate 916 is located in the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 is OFF. In addition, the seventh light blocking plate 926
Is located in the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the seventh detection sensor 897, and the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897 is OFF. That is, in the initial state, both the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are turned off. Based on this, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions. ..

Since the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are interlocked, the second central movable effect member 910 must be in the initial position according to the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889. It is also possible to detect that the first central movable effect member 900 is at the initial position by detecting. Also, a third central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930.
Are linked with each other, the fourth central movable effect member 930 is detected by detecting that the third central movable effect member 920 is at the initial position based on the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897.
Can also be detected in the initial position. Therefore, the effect control device 300, based on that the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are both OFF, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member. It can be understood that 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions.

From this initial state, when the motor 886 is operated, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 rotate so as to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 920 and The fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates so as to rise. Along with this, the sixth light shielding plate 916 is retracted from the detection portion of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 is turned ON. Further, the seventh light shielding plate 926 is retracted from the detecting portion of the seventh detection sensor 897, and the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897 is turned on. That is, the effect control device 300, based on that the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are both OFF, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member. It can be understood that 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions.

Therefore, the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 make up the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 920 that form the board effect device 44.
And the position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the effect accessory switch 47 for detecting the initial position.

Then, in the operation completed state shown in FIG. 14, the decorative portion 901 of the first central movable effect member 900.
, The decorative portion 911 of the second central movable effect member 910, and the decorative portion 9 of the third central movable effect member 920.
21 and the decorative portion 931 of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. In addition, the end faces of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 are opposed to and close to the end faces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 to form one annular shape as a whole. ing. Each of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 is made of a material that does not transmit light, and the portion where the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 are located is in a state in which the display of the display device 41 cannot be viewed from the front.

Next, the configuration of the special variation winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 15 to 17, the special variation winning device 38 includes a flow path rear wall 962 arranged along the front surface of the game board body 80,
The flow path front wall 952 disposed on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962 is sandwiched between the flow path 38f and the game balls can flow down in a row. This downflow path 38f is inclined so as to descend to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls are arranged to flow down in one row toward the left in one row.

As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the bottom surface of the substantially downward portion of the flow-down passage 38f is formed by an opening/closing member 990 that is slidable in the front-rear direction. The opening/closing member 990 is shown in FIGS.
As shown in (a), it is a closed state in which a game ball cannot project into the special variation winning device 38 (big winning opening 38d) as shown in FIG. 17A, and as shown in FIG. Winning mouth 3
It is possible to convert the game ball into an open state in which the game ball can be won in 8d. That is, when the opening/closing member 990 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 and passes through the special winning opening 38d, and when the opening/closing member 990 is in the open state. It is designed to flow into the special winning opening. In addition, when the opening/closing member 990 is in the closed state, the flow path front wall 9
Although there is a gap between 52 and 52, the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 18, the special variation winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 including a flow path front wall 952.
A rear wall member 960 including a flow path rear wall 962, a main body 970 to which the opening/closing member 990 and the like are attached, and a cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the main body 970.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The front surface of the front surface portion 951 is arranged in proximity to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game balls do not flow down in front of this front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is decorated and a part thereof is a lens capable of transmitting light. LEDs (not shown) are arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as decoration means, and the special variation winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variation winning device 38 is different from the emission color of the collective display device 50, which prevents the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from being difficult to understand. Further, the upper part of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 serves as a flow path front wall 952 which forms a front side wall of the downflow passage 38f.

As shown in FIG. 16, on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952, a plurality of front wall protruding portions 9 protruding rearward are provided.
54 is provided. The front wall protruding portion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped protruding portion whose left and right side surfaces are inclined surfaces, and the protruding portion 9 is provided in front of each of the plurality of protruding portions 992 provided on the opening/closing member 990.
It is provided so as to be located slightly upstream of 92. The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing leftward to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion with which the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f can come into contact. Since the front wall protrusion 954 is located slightly upstream,
The game ball flowing down to the left is guided rearward by the front wall protrusion 954 and then further rearward by the protrusion 992, so that the game ball can be effectively guided.

As shown in FIG. 19, the rear surface side of the front wall member 950 is provided with a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 953 extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The extension wall 953 has a different function depending on the place where the extension wall 953 is provided.
, A big winning opening forming portion 953b forming a side wall or a bottom surface of the big winning opening 38d, a guiding passage forming portion 953c forming a guiding passage 955 for guiding a game ball that has won the big winning opening 38d, and a big winning opening switch 38a. A switch attaching portion forming portion 953d forming the attaching portion 956 to be attached, a general winning opening forming portion 953e forming the general winning opening 35, and a peripheral wall for preventing the game balls flowing around the special variation winning device 38 from entering the inside. It has a function as 953f.

The bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f is an inclined surface that is inclined to the right when viewed from the back surface side. In addition, the special winning opening forming portion 953b is inclined so that the game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening 38d are collected in the guide passage 955. Game balls can flow into the guide flow passage 955 in a line, and a special winning opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion of the guide flow passage 955. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening 38d will flow into the guide passage 955 after being detected by the special winning opening switch 38a. The guide flow passage 955 formed by the guide flow passage forming portion 953c is a flow passage that guides the game ball from the special winning opening 38d to the back surface side of the game board 30, and the back surface of the front surface portion 951 has the game ball backward. Ribs 957 for guiding to are formed. In addition, the general winning opening forming portion 953e is for forming a general winning opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variation winning device 38. On the back of the front part 951, this general winning hole 3
Ribs 958 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into 5 to the rear are formed.

As shown in FIG. 20A, the rear wall member 960 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961. The front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961. The portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 serves as a flow path rear wall 962 that forms a rear side wall of the downflow passage 38f. In addition, the channel rear wall 9
An opening/closing member insertion portion 963 is formed at the lower end of 62 to penetrate the opening/closing member 990 from the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction.

Further, a plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 that protrude forward are provided on the front surface side of the flow channel rear wall 962. As shown in FIG. 16, the rear wall protrusion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recesses 993 provided in the opening/closing member 990. The rear wall protrusion 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing leftward to the front in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion with which the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f can come into contact. Since the rear wall projecting portion 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, the game ball flows down the passage 3 in a portion where the recess 993 is not provided.
It is possible to prevent the right side portion of 8f from flowing down, and it is possible to surely meander the game ball.

Returning to FIG. 20, in the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 and in the front wall member 950, the guide passage 95 is formed.
A penetrating portion 968 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in a portion opposite to the portion where 5 is formed so that the guide passage 955 communicates with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961. In addition, above the guide passage 955, the switch mounting portion 9 which penetrates the rear portion of the special winning opening switch 38a so as to be able to be housed in the front and rear direction.
65 is formed. Further, in the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 and a portion facing the portion of the front wall member 950 in which the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game balls winning the general winning opening 35 are transferred to the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate the general winning opening channel 966 to be guided with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 20B, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 967 extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 961 are provided on the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960. The extension wall 967 has a different function depending on the place where the extension wall 967 is formed. It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variation winning device 38.

The guide flow passage forming portion 967a forms a guide flow passage 955 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back side downward. In addition, the guide passage 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961.
A rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the. The general winning opening channel forming portion 967b forms the general winning opening passage 966 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 966a to the back side downward. Further, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed on the rear surface portion 961.

The peripheral wall 967c is formed in conformity with the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates the front and rear sides formed in the portion of the game board body 80 where the special variation winning device 38 is attached.
When 8 is attached to the game board body 80, the peripheral wall 967c is in a state of being inserted into the penetrating portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the peripheral wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board body 80 when the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the game board body 80. A boss for positioning and a plurality of screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main body portion 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that is aligned with the peripheral wall 967c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 includes a rear wall portion 972 that faces the guide passage forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms a rear wall of the guide passage 955. In this rear wall portion 972, at a position facing the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, the game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetrating portion 968 is introduced into the guide flow passage 955. A rib 973 is formed so as to be guided rightward. Further, a penetrating portion 974 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear wall portion 972 at a position facing the downstream end portion of the guide flow passage 955 formed in the rear wall member 960. The game ball flowing down the guide flow path 955 is guided rearward by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, and is guided to the back side of the main body 970 to the outside of the game machine. It is designed to flow into a discharge flow path for discharging.

In addition, in the portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear wall member 960, a penetrating for guiding the game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 to the back side of the main body 970. The part 975 is formed. The game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 is guided to the back side of the main body 970 through the penetrating portion 975, detected by the winning opening switch 35a, and then discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. It is designed to flow into the road.

An opening/closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports the opening/closing member 990 that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening/closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960. The opening/closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion that penetrates the main body portion 970 in the front-rear direction,
A guide wall 977 capable of abutting the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces of the opening/closing member 990 and capable of guiding and supporting the opening/closing member 990 is provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening/closing member unit 980 including an opening/closing member 990 and an operation mechanism that operates the opening/closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body 970. This opening/closing member unit 980 is
A unit base member 981 for mounting various members, an opening/closing member 990 slidable in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening/closing member 990 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the opening/closing member unit 980 has a state in which the special variation winning device 38 is closed with the opening/closing member 990 protruding forward, and as shown in FIG. 22B. The opening/closing member 990 can be converted into a state in which the member 990 is retracted rearward and the special variation winning device 38 is opened. The opening/closing member 990 can appear above the special winning opening 38d via the opening/closing member holding portion 976 formed on the main body portion 970 and the opening/closing member insertion portion 963 formed on the rear wall member 960.

The opening/closing member 990 is arranged so as to be slidable back and forth in a holding portion 982 formed on an upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 23( a ), the opening/closing member 990 is configured such that the front end portion of the upper surface extending above the special winning opening 38 d is lowered by one step, and the downflow passage 38 f is formed.
Is a flow path forming portion 991 that forms the bottom surface of the.

The flow path forming portion 991 is formed with a plurality of protruding portions 992 that protrude upward in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990. The upstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, and the game ball flowing down from the right side can be smoothly guided backward toward the recessed portion 993. Further, the downstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side, so that it can be guided in the downstream direction when a game ball flowing out from the recess 993 to the front comes into contact.

Further, in the stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 which is lowered by one step, and which is opposed to the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction, a concave portion 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed rearward is formed. Recess 9
The gap between the side surface of the step portion forming 93 and the side surface of the protruding portion 992 is set so that the game balls can flow down in a single row at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surface of the step portion forming the recess 993 is formed obliquely so that the front side faces the downstream side, and the game ball can smoothly flow out from the recess 993 to the front. There is.

That is, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is provided with undulations such as the protrusion 992 and the recess 993. As will be described later, due to such undulations, the time during which the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 990 is extended.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is an oblique surface that descends to the left, and the game ball is made to flow to the left. In addition, sliding parts 994 extending downward are formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening/closing member 990. The sliding portion 994 is formed so as to extend along the front-rear direction, and by contacting the upper surface of the holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981, the opening/closing member 990 on the holding portion 982. It becomes slidable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 that is inclined so that the lower end is located rearward of the upper end. Since the inclined surface 996 is formed in this manner, the opening/closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952 are closed when the opening/closing member 990 is closed.
When a game ball exists between and, the game ball can be escaped upward or downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, a connecting portion 995 to which a drive arm 983 for transmitting the driving force from the special winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening/closing member 990 is formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the opening/closing member 990. ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 24B, the holding portion 982 is formed with a penetrating portion 982a through which the connecting pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted, and the connecting pin 983a is opened and closed through the penetrating portion 982a. It is connected to the connection part 995 of the 990. In addition, in FIG.
As shown in a), the holding portion 982 is formed with guide ribs 982b located on the left and right of the connecting portion 995 and extending along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening/closing member 990 in the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 25, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the special winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotary shaft 983b extending in the up-down direction, and is rotatable around the rotary shaft 983b. In addition,
The rotating shaft 983b is rotatably held by being sandwiched by the main body portion 970 and the rear wall member 960 from the front and rear (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 25A, when the special variation winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft 38g of the special winning opening solenoid 38b extends and the drive arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range. .. In this state, the drive arm 983 is in a state of being most rotated clockwise around the rotation shaft 983b when viewed from the back surface side, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

To open the special variation winning device 38 from this state, the special winning opening solenoid 38b
By retracting the drive shaft 38g of the drive arm 983, the drive arm 983 pivots counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 983b when viewed from the back side, and moves the connection pin 983a rearward to open and close the opening/closing member. Retract 990 backwards. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the special variation winning device 38 is brought into an open state. When the special variation winning device 38 is closed, the operation reverse to the above operation is performed.

26 to 29, the manner in which the game balls flow down in the special variation winning device 38 is shown. 28 and 29, a part of the front wall member 950 is seen through for the sake of explanation. The game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f from the right to the left is the rear wall protrusion 964 located on the most upstream side first.
Is guided obliquely to the front side and flows into the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening/closing member 990. Then, the front wall protrusion 954 guides obliquely rearward and the protrusion 99 of the opening/closing member 990.
It is guided obliquely rearward by 2 and flows into the recess 993. The game ball flowing into the recess 993,
It is guided again obliquely forward by the side surface on the downstream side of the concave portion 993 formed obliquely toward the downstream side and the front wall protrusion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

After that, the guide to the diagonal rear by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992 and the guide to the diagonal front by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f meanders back and forth. While flowing down. As a result, the staying time on the opening/closing member 990 becomes longer than in the case where the front wall protruding portion 954, the rear wall protruding portion 964, the protruding portion 992, and the recess 993 do not have undulations and flow straight down in the downflow passage 38f. It will be. Therefore, FIG. 28 and FIG.
As shown in FIG. 9(a), the game balls are always present on the opening/closing member 990, and even when the opening time of the special variation winning device 38 is short, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, FIG.
It is highly possible that the game ball existing on the opening/closing member 990 will fall and win the special winning opening 38d as shown in (4), and the player should have an expectation for winning even if the opening is short. You can In addition, it is preferable to secure the time required for the game balls to stay on the opening/closing member 990 as the interval time for closing the special variation winning device 38 before the short opening round. ..

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30A, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the game balls staying on the opening/closing member 990 come into contact with the protrusion 992 formed on the opening/closing member 990. As shown in 30(b), it bounces and is guided in a direction away from the special winning opening 38d. In addition, the bouncing game ball may be further separated from the special winning opening 38d by contacting the front wall protrusion 954 of the channel front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the channel rear wall 962, and the like. Also, the opening/closing member 990
Since the projecting portion 992 formed at is arranged at an interval through which the game ball can pass, the projecting portion 992 may fall through the space without contacting the projecting portion 992. It should be noted that the special variation winning device 38 opening time in the case of a short opening described later is a time in which even a game ball that bounces in contact with the protrusion 992 or the like can flow into the special winning opening 38d as described above. ing. Thereby, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the special winning opening 38d.

By thus providing the protruding portion 992, the front wall protruding portion 954, and the rear wall protruding portion 964, the rolling aspect of the game ball at the time of opening the opening/closing member 990 becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. .. Further, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, it is possible to shift the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening/closing member 990 to the special winning opening 38d, and a ball clogging occurs in the special winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

The front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, and the protrusion 992 are formed as undulations in the flow-down passage 38f.
Although the recess 993 is provided, it may be other than this. For example, a wobbling groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 as an ups and downs, and the game ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. Further, as an undulation, a rib-shaped protrusion or groove is provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the flow-down direction, and when the game ball flows down, it is flown down while being moved in the vertical direction by the protrusion or groove. You can

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow down is provided, and the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening) provided in the game area 32. 97) A variation display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variation display game is a special result. In the machine, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be prized. The special variable prize device 38 is converted into the open state in the special game condition. The special variable prize device 38 is , A game ball can be won from the opening facing upward, and in the closed state the opening is closed to prevent the game ball from winning, and in the open state, the opening is opened to allow the game ball to be won. 990 is provided, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 in the closed state, and the opening/closing member 990 is provided with undulations (protruding portion 992, recessed portion 993) on the upper surface, and there is no undulation. Also, the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game balls during the special game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the downflow passage 38f is formed around the downflow passage 38f constituted by the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990.
A contact portion (front wall protruding portion 954, rear wall protruding portion 964) capable of contacting the game ball flowing down f is provided. Therefore, by contacting the contact portion, the time for which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 becomes longer, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game. it can.

Also, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right end portions on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 to the other, and the undulations formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 move the flowing game ball back and forth. It is formed to meander. Therefore, the opening/closing member 990
The game ball stays on the upper surface for a longer time, and the decrease of the game ball during the special game state can be suppressed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

The special variation winning device 38 is configured to be opened and closed by the opening/closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction, but in the closed state, the upper surface is parallel to cover the special winning opening 38d,
In the open state, it may be configured to rotate downward.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is provided, and a starting area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) provided in the playing area 32.
In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on a winning of a game ball to a player, and a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. , The game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be prized, and includes a special variation winning device 38 that is converted into an open state in the special gaming state. The game ball can be won from the opening facing toward, and in the closed state it projects forward and closes the opening to disable the winning of the game ball, and in the open state it retracts backward and opens the opening of the game ball. An opening/closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction is provided to enable winning, and in the closed state, a game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990. The opening/closing member 990 is undulated (projecting portion) on the upper surface. 992, a concave portion 993) are provided, and the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a longer time than in the case where there is no undulation, and at the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990, at the front end. The inclined surface 996 is formed so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases.

Therefore, the opening/closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface, and the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member for a longer time than in the case where the undulations are not provided. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the number of games, and to increase the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the inclined surface 996 is formed at the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught at the time of closing.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught at the time of closing, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. it can.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having the same, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (called an amusement chip (IC)).
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, D generated by the power supply device 400 are provided in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as C5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC- that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter for generating a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 are supplied with a power supply voltage during a power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And, it has a power failure monitoring circuit, and is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
1 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A game state in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of the left, the middle, and the right (for example, the same Status that has become identification information,
However, the special result mode is excluded), and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the normal effect (N reach), the special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as the reach effects in which the possibility of deriving the special result mode is different (expected value is different), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It has become higher in order of premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random pattern generation to generate a random pattern for determining the reach of various reach or variation display games without reach, etc.) And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A executes the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (
(Big hit or small hit) or out), probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, normal variation winning device 3 as the current game state
Any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the operation status of 7 (time saving operation status (universal power support status)), the number of starting memories, and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation allocation information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37.
Starting port 2 switch 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in second starting winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in universal figure starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, special variation winning device 38
Connected to the special winning opening switch 38a, and the high level supplied from these switches is 1
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for inputting a negative logic signal such as a low level of 7V at 1V and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided. Proximity I/F 12
In No. 1, the input range was set to 7V-11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch were illegally short-circuited, the sensor and switch were removed from the connector, and the lead wires were cut and floated. Such an abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, proximity I/F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the special winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. R. Also, of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
The detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided in the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the gaming machine 1
Detection signal of the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of 0, the gaming machine 10
A detection signal of a main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10
It is also designed to be supplied from 0 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of the a and the starting port 3 switch 97a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in a signal based on the above) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is input to the ports 122, 123,
Not supplied to 124. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the test is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-shooting test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variable winning device 38 (a special winning opening solenoid) 38b and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
Second for outputting the opening/closing data of the solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c for opening b
An output port 134 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives a opening/closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the universal solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The second driver 1 for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S3, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to an external inspection device 450. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b
Equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 for a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of the solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) To receive. Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
Operates at 5V DC, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3V DC, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 is provided. Further, a board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) is provided.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as the board effect device 44, the first lower movable member 740, 741, the second
Lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 8
60, a first central movable effect member 900, a second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920, and a fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. In addition, even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device may be provided. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 detects the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the board effect device 44, and the like. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 are detected. Main control microcomputer 311
A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
32V for driving a motor and a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor and an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic components controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating or DC1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools each part of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
A game is performed by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The first start winning hole 36
The second start winning port 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32.
Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, a number corresponding to the type of the winning opening won. The prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided, and the game area 32 is provided. When the game ball hit in passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU1 of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100
In 11A, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the universal figure starting memory number is set. The addition (+1) is performed and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of the universal figure start winning is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for determination of hit (random number value for determination) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not being executed, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not the hit state, the hit judgment random number value stored in the first-mentioned normal figure starting memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to judge the hit of the general figure variation display game. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the public figure display provided in the collective display device 50 as a process for executing the general figure variable display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the order, the process of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the general-drawing display device is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are normally used as the identification information, and these are variably displayed for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed to display the result. You may do it.

When the result of the universal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol, which has a special result mode on the universal figure display, is stopped according to the type of hit At the same time as displaying, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to perform the control of opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the public-picture display unit, which is the result mode of the off-going.

The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 provided inside, respectively.
It is detected by the switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) of the first starting memory which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on winning in the first starting winning opening 36 is set. In addition to being stored in the limit, the second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal variation winning device 37, is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). Remember. Based on the winnings to the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as starting memory information. The extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. Then, the number of memories of the starting memory is displayed on the special display 1 reserved display or the special display 2 reserved display of the collective display device 50, and also as a decorative special drawing start storage display on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Is displayed. Further, the information display device 630
But it is displayed.

When the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game is ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The generated big hit determination random number value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process for determining the hitting deviation of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

When the first special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After performing the special character 1 changing display, the processing for displaying the first special character changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. In the case of executing the second special figure variable display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display device 52 (variable display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, in the display device 41 (variable display device) or the information display device 630 corresponding to the special figure variable display game (for example, A process for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game in which numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, the game control device 100
Based on a control signal from the speaker, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b,
The process etc. which control the light emission of various LEDs are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variable display area (first special symbol),
In the right fluctuation display area (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, after a predetermined time, the symbols that are changing are stopped in order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area, and stopped in each of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed for the purpose of improving the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variable display game on the information display device 630, the light emitting member is made to blink during variable display, and when the stop time is reached, the light emitting member is made to emit light in accordance with the result of the special figure variable display game (lighting, blinking, extinction). Etc.). That is, a decorative special pattern ((
The result mode is displayed by (4th pattern).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, causes the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 to have a special result mode or a small hit result mode. While displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special game state or a small hit game state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
The PU 111A controls, for example, by opening the opening/closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38 with the special winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. And
The special winning opening is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. Doing is one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of times. That is, when the game result control device 100 has changed the stop result mode to the special result mode,
It constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure variation display game (general figure probability) is a high probability (general figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the normal state low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in this embodiment, the universal figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the figure change display game (the figure change time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the figure stop time for displaying the result of the figure change display game is, for example, 6
It becomes 00 msec, and when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) of the first hit stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 500).
msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal electric opening time) and number of times of opening (for example, 17)
00msec × 2 times), 3rd stop symbol opening time (normal electric opening time) and number of times of opening (eg,
1700 msec×3 times) can be set.

In addition, the execution time of the universal figure variation display game, the universal figure stop time, the number of regular electricity open, and the universal electricity open time are appropriately set so that the general figure variation display game and the ordinary variation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time (
It is possible to control the normal figure variation time) to be the second variation time shorter than the first variation time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec. 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1
352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times of normal electric power open) is set to the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game.
It is possible to set the second number of times of opening more than that (for example, four times). In the time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the figure variation display game (universal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability in the normal operation state (general figure low probability state, for example, 1/251). The probability (universal figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) can be used.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the time saving state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

The special display 1 display 51 and the special display 2 display 52 may be separate display or the same display, but each special display variation display so as not to be executed independently or at the same time. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas for the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special variable display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the gaming machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Also,
In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting opening 3 in the second starting winning opening 97. The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact for detecting a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc.,
Microswitches with mechanical contacts can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, first, the process of inhibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area where the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S).
4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
A process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
Operation 2 can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time elapses, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting the waiting time elapses, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the status before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) are performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power is cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the power failure from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. ..

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read/write memory (RWM) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and off data is output (output to all output ports). Is set) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15), and read in advance. Then, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17), and the normal operation is performed. If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17).
18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19),
It is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (step S2).
0). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), step S21 in FIG.
Move to and perform the process when the power is restored normally.

Also, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y),
When it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17)
N or step S18; N), the checksum is not normal (step S20; N)
If it is determined that the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 34 and the initialization process is performed. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

In step S21 of FIG. 34, the initial value when power is restored is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In addition, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed. Then R
The area for storing the game state in the WM is examined to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when the probability of the special figure is not high (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25.
If the probability of the special figure is high (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30. The ON (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S2).
5) and proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, first, a model designation command is transmitted, and further, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a power failure recovery command, a screen designation command (waiting for customer). If so, send multiple commands such as a customer wait demo screen command, otherwise a recovery screen command). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is given to the production control board (production control device 300).
To (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, step S
In 30, first, a model designation command is transmitted, and further, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( For example, 30 seconds) a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization by light and sound are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. That is, the model designation command is first transmitted to the effect control device 300 both when the power is restored and when the RAM is initialized, and the model designation command is controlled after the power of the game machine is turned on. This is the first information transmitted to the device 300.

In step S31, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform the process to activate the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Performed by A. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on
Value of each, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, a random number for determining the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), a random number for determining the hit of the general figure (random number per hit) ), after saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (a winning symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the universal symbol (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34).
Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of timer interrupt processing. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. The random numbers are +1 or -1.
May be used for the counter type update, or a random type update may be used in which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and the data bus and checked (for example, twice).
Is set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S3).
7). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the initial value random number updating process (
It returns to step S35). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By allowing the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main processing, the initial value random number updating processing in step S35 described above includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating processing in the timer interrupt processing as well. In order to prevent the value random number updating process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. There is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process when the initial value random number updating process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process.
This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
.. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S3
8; N) returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily interrupting is performed (step S39).
), a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41).
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S45), it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the activation of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 35 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S4) in the main process described above.
3) is shown. In this checksum calculation processing, first, RW is set as the start value of the calculated address.
The start address of M is set (step S51), and the number of repetitions is set (step S52).
, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). RA used for the number of repetitions
The number of M bytes is set.

Then, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S5
4), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (step S57). When the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 36 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update processing, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.
Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is a small hit of the special symbol variation display game It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. Also, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit in the universal figure variation display game, "hit pattern initial value random number"
Is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a hit stop symbol of the universal figure variation display game. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.
Incidentally, the small hit random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. Further, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no random number for the initial winning symbol.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the timer interrupt processing, the periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is the CPU.
It is started by inputting to 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, universal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the launch permission state seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106),
Random number update processing 2 (step S107) is performed. After that, it is monitored whether or not a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the universal gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a. Alternatively, a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a special figure variable display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a general figure variable display game.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio irregularity for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
13) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt-disabled state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S1).
21). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Then, save the read status of the input port 1 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (
After storing (step S123), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. (Step S12
7), switch reading processing (step S128) is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in the RWM or another memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130).
). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

The unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, but as a result, they may have the same value. is there.
Further, although the bit data to be inverted in the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted in the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data,
As a result, the data may have the same value.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the switch reading process in the above-mentioned input process (steps S128 and S133)
Will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 39, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal input to the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is set. It is saved (stored) in (step S144). After that, it waits until the delay time until the second reading (for example, about 100 μs) elapses (step S
145).

When the delay time has elapsed, the state of the signal input to the target input port is read a second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is set. Save to
(Step S149). After that, set the bit that has the same status in the first and second reading to 1
, A definite bit pattern in which the different bit is set to 0 is created (step S150), the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and the bit is decided this time (step S15).
1).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 0 and the different bit is 1 is created in the first read and the second read (step S152), and the logic of the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is obtained and set as the previously held bit (step S153). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to switch chattering or the like has been removed. Then, the current confirmed bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the current confirmed state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous time and the current confirmed state is taken, and the result is saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Switch read processing ends.

If the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is
There is a method to determine whether the signal has changed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing it with the result of the previous reading. If the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost, the correct judgment may not be possible. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data output to the output port 134 which outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to a digit/external information output port. 136
Is output (step S166).
After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, the general display, the special display 1 hold display, and the special display 2 hold, which are various displays provided in the collective display device 50, are provided. Display, public display hold display, round display and second
Dynamically turn on the game status display section.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (
For example, the data of "big hit signal 1", the data of "big hit signal 2", the data of "big hit signal 3", the data of "big hit signal 4", the data of "symbol confirmation frequency signal", the data of "starting mouth signal" , "Main prize ball signal data" and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S1).
70), and outputs the combined data to the output port 137 for outputting external information/firing permission signal (step S171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). And by comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payouts.

In each of these prize number counter areas, there is a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (in the present embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three prize ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1
Up to 65535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively. The ball counter area is configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked among the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not. Then, if there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S183; N), step S
Returning to step 181, the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, Obtains the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area is added to the acquired number of payouts (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Then, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 (step S189; N), step S189 is performed.
The processing moves to 192. When the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S191), and step S18
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, so It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). When the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal indicates an on state (busy state). To be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. If it is in a state, it is configured to send a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform wasteful processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the control burden.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave illegal occurrence, payout ball detection switch (paid ball). The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (the number of award balls not yet paid out = the number of remaining game balls remaining) ) (When not equal to 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S195). Prize counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count in step S195 (step S195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine whether.

If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S197). With this judgment,
When it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 to repeat the above process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count (step S195; Y), the count in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
The payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S199). Then, the obtained payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 msec, for example, is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the gaming control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 42 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process.
In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S211; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in the register (start value setting register) (step S213). Then, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit random number of the universal symbol is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).
If the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hitting symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial of the loaded small hitting symbol random number. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) which holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

When the hit random number of the universal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).
). If the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the loaded random number of the hit figure is initialized next time. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number of the general figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).
..

When the hit symbol random number of the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Further, when the hit symbol random number of the universal symbol is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221).
), a random number counter (random number area) corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded random number
Is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of (step S22
2) and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 43 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number updating process 2 updates both of them. The update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the upper byte and the lower byte are updated at different interrupt times. That is, 2 by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process.
The update of the byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) is configured to be executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte.

In the random number updating process 2, first, a random number updating scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the present updating process is updated (step S231). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated,
When it is ", the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.

Next, for example, in the CPU used as the game microcomputer in the present embodiment, D
A refresh register used for refreshing RAM (hereinafter referred to as "R register").
Is provided, but instead, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). Randomness can be added to the random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. If you want to update
It is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte is added value (hereinafter, this Is referred to as a "masked value") is set to a mask update value obtained by adding "1", the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the added value ( Step S238), Step S239
Proceed to. It should be noted that the reason why "1" is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), and proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value (1) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. (Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S243). When the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random number value (step S244), and this value is set to 1 Byte random number or 2
The data is saved in the lower random number area of the byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. Also, 2
If it is a byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S24).
7) and the random number update process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated on the effect random number update table (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) , The address of the update area, etc. are defined for each type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. It constitutes a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 44 shows a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
08). In this prize-winning switch/state monitoring process, first, a prize-winning mouth monitoring table corresponding to the prize-winning mouth switch 38a in the prize-winning entrance (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the prize-winning opening is opened. Despite that there is no fraudulent winning in the big winning opening, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step S304) of detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the prize-winning mouth monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of the fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area,
The information of the illegal prize winning error notification command, the upper limit value of the illegal prize winning number (the number of illegal occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. In addition, in the winning table of the winning port monitoring table, the number of times the monitoring is repeated (the number of switches)
In addition, for each switch, information on the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Poden (step S305), monitor whether there is an illegal winning, and detect fraud & winning monitoring processing to detect a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) which does not require the fraudulent monitoring processing is prepared (step S307), and the winning a prize is won. The winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the number is performed.

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose states should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the status scan counter of is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S310). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Monitoring of the state based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. R.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the glass frame opening detection switch 63
The status monitoring is set based on the signal output from the, and the value of the status scan counter is "1".
If it is, monitoring of the state is set based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred (step S
316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Monitoring of conditions based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", and therefore is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 msec.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 45 shows the fraud & winning prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning hole switch/state monitoring process. This fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is performed by the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37 of the normal variation winning device 37.
This is the process performed on a. With regard to the big winning opening (special variation winning device 38) and Hoden (ordinary variation winning device 37), it is easy to open the opening/closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In this fraud & winning a prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (
Step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the special winning port switch 38a, and the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is executed based on the hit of the ordinary figure.

When it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S3).
32). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of illegal prizes is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated number of illegal prizes is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations of the monitoring target. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of the present embodiment, the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning hole switch that is the object of error monitoring. You can also The determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is valid for the big winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being determined to be illegal when a prize is passed after passing or when there is noise on a signal, and to not easily determine an error even if it is not illegal.

If the number of fraudulent prizes is not equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number to be monitored (step S325)
;N) prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (step S330).
.. In addition, when the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or larger than the number of fraudulent occurrence determination targets to be monitored (step S325;
Y) keeps the number of fraudulent prizes at the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (step S326), and saves the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area (step S327). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step S328), a fraud prize generation flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, when the fraud monitoring period is not in progress (step S322; N), the prize-winning port monitoring table of the target prize-winning port switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting the prize ball is performed. To do. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0. After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333), and if the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step S333).
334), an unauthorized prize release flag is prepared as an unauthorized flag (step S335). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of illegal prizes is cleared ( In step S337, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S337).
Step S338). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer reaches 0 (step S3)
36; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the previous fraud & winning award monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338).

When the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S
338; Y) ends the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S339), and the effect command setting process is performed. (
(Step S340), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an incorrect prize winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, and the start and end of error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning prize counter update processing]
FIG. 46 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In the prize number counter updating process, first, the number of prize hole switches to be monitored is acquired from the prize hole monitoring table (step S351), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize hole switch (to be exact, a change in input). The determination is made (step S352).

When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). Also, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (
In step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S3).
53), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S
355; N) saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356),
The value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (transmission of payout command) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (0 to 65
535).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S35).
9). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). , It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). When an overflow occurs (step S35)
9; Y) updates the table address to the address of the next record (step S361).
, It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). In the case of this embodiment,
In step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0 to 255).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). When the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is finished.
By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
In FIG. 47, the gaming machine state check process in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring process (
Steps S311, S313, S316) are shown. In this gaming machine status check process,
First, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step S371).
, It is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table (winning prize switch/game machine status monitoring table prepared in the status monitoring process). This information includes
For example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, the mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, the signal ON determination data, Includes a status off command (which constitutes an error notification end command in the case of an error system), a status on command (which constitutes an error notification start command in the case of an error system), a status off monitoring timer comparison value, and a status on monitoring timer comparison value ..

When the target signal is not ON (step S372; N), the state OFF flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the target state OFF command is acquired and prepared (step S373).
Step S374). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S
375), and compare the value of the target signal control region with the current signal state (step S379).
.. If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), it means that the error signal is not an error (normal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), the state ON flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S377). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S3).
79). If the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), it means that the error-based signal indicates an error (abnormal or illegal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is touched. Is a state indicating.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S379; Y)
, That is, if the signal status has not changed, the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (
In step S382), it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S379; N), that is, when the signal status changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S382). Step S383).

When the value of the target status monitoring timer is not greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N
) Ends the gaming machine status check processing. If the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value -1 is retained (step S384). The status flag that has been set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is executed. After performing (step S387), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 48 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first,
It is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is ON (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32) is set.
(msec) is set (step S393), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the current signal state (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), the idle state flag is prepared as the state flag (step S391).
394), and set the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) (step S395).
, It is determined whether the value of the busy signal status region matches the current signal status (step S39).
6). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

When the value in the busy signal status area does not match the current signal status (step S396; N)
), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S398), and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value in the busy signal status area matches the current signal status (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400), and if it is not greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The pay-out busy signal check process ends. In addition, when it is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the value is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The state flag is saved in the pay-out busy signal flag area (step S402), and the pay-out busy signal check processing is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the status of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed if the changed status continues for the signal confirmation time. It is hard to be affected by such as.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes indefinite until any signal state continues for the signal fixing time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 3
7a, the input of the starting port 3 switch 97a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the display of the special figure is set.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a (
Perform step A1). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, if there is a winning game ball in the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.)
Is performed, and a game result pre-determination for pre-determining the game result based on the prize is performed before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
If it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if it has timed up or has already timed up, the special figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the variation start setting and effect setting of the special figure variation display game and the special figure variation are in progress. Special figure normal processing (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
If the special figure game process number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process are performed. (Step A
Perform 9).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and a special winning opening for each big hit Special figure display processing (step A10) for setting fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing fanfare/interval processing
)I do.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the special opening opening processing is set. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, or the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and a big hit end process are executed. Special winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing
I do.
When the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit ending process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit. A small hit fanfare processing (step A15) for setting necessary information is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "8", the process for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc.
16) is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls won in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process and a small hit ending process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
When the special figure game process number is "10" in step A7, a small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
19), the symbol variation control processing (step A20) relating to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. And
After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is ended. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the continuous accessory operating device is operated). When the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has meaning.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a first starting port (first starting winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is set. The information indicating that the prize has been won is set. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 1 (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In 103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time saving is in progress (supporting universal communication) (step A).
104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A104;
For Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) does not win unless left-handed, and the normal variable winning apparatus 37 does not win unless right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the game state in which the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed is a gaming state, but when there is a winning in the first starting opening during the time-shortened (that is, when left-handed is hit during the time-shortened) In addition, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information on the hold by the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared for a winning monitoring table (step A1).
09), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is set. The information indicating that the prize has been won is set. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting opening (step A111
In N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111)
111; Y), the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is operated and the gaming ball is in the open state in which the winning can be achieved (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric auditors product is operating (step A112; Y). , And proceeds to the processing of step A114 to perform the subsequent processing. On the other hand, step A
When it is determined in 112 that the ordinary electric auditors product is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the normal electric power illegality is occurring (step A113).

At Step A113, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). Ordinary variable winning device 37,
The game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore,
When a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and when there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. If the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the unauthorized use of the universal telephone is not occurring (step A113; N
) Prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) (step A114), and after performing special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115), processing of step A116. And the subsequent processing is performed. Also, step A113
If it is determined that the illegal communication is occurring (step A113; Y), step A1
The process proceeds to 16 and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A11).
6), a hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process,
When there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the fact that the target starting port is won Set the information shown. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the third starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A118).
When it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning in the third starting opening (step A118)
; N) ends the starting port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning in the third starting opening (step A118)
In step 118;Y), it is determined whether or not the special time saving is in progress (supporting universal communication) (step A).
119).

When it is determined in step A119 that it is not during the special drawing time saving (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A119;
In Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A120) and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) does not win if the player does not hit left, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless he hits right. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the right-handed state is more advantageous in the gaming state than the left-handed state, but when there is a winning in the third starting opening during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). In the above, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step A122), special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A123) is performed to monitor the starting opening switch. The process ends.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring process.
, A110, A117) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 51, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 3).
7) and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the non-winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A131), and the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a,
Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 3 switches 97a (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A134). ..

When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, when the random number is not extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A134; Y)
Loads the extracted jackpot random number into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepares it (step A135). Then, of the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (ordinary variation winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the winning opening to be monitored is won. The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a are input.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, and a starting opening 3 switch 97a, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the starting opening switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 The output count is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A14).
3).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is RW.
The data is saved in the M number of starting port signal output times (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), step A1
The process moves to 45. In the present embodiment, the starting port signal output frequency range is set from "0" to "255".
Values up to "" can be stored. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows and not saved.

Next, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97.
Of a, it is determined whether the number of special figure suspension (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A145).
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.
If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (special map 1 reserved number or special map 2 reserved number) is updated by +1 ( Step A14
6) Prepare a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform effect command setting processing (step A148), and set the target start mouth winning flag. It is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the start port switch to be monitored and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of special figure reservations are calculated (step A150).
The jackpot random numbers prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing of steps A102, A110, and A117 are saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step A151). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This big hit symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A160).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in this embodiment) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A154). And the first
It is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A155). When it is determined in step A155 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A155; N)
In step A158, the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A155 that the winning is to the first starting opening (step A155; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted,
Prepare (step A156) and save in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A157). At step A158, the address (any place from hold 1 to 8) of the variable order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area is calculated. Then, the variation order flag of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved (step A159), special figure hold information determination processing (step A160) is performed, and the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37. As a starting memory that is the right to execute the variable display game, the starting memory means stores a predetermined number up to the upper limit. In addition, the starting storage means (game control device 100) is a random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 which is the starting opening of the special FIG. Various random number values that are stored as start-up memory and are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of Toku-zu 2 and the normal variation winning device 37 are second started up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process (step A in the special figure starting port switch common process described above).
160) will be described in detail. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 53, first, a big hit determination process (step A161) is performed to determine whether or not a big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target opening switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152 is set. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is in the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A165).
When it is determined in step A165 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A165
; N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A170), and step A171.
Process shifts to.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A165 that the winning is to the first starting opening (step A165
165; Y), a small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step A
170) and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is set. After acquisition (step A169), the process proceeds to step A171.

Then, a read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A172). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A173) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A173). A174).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A175), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A176), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-reading target, and a pre-reading variation pattern command including the variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thus, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment etc.) Make a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the starting winning when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening opening processing is being performed (step A201). .. When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step S201). A202).

When the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether the small hitting processing is being performed (step A203). ). If processing is being performed during the small hit (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Also, if the process is not in progress during the small hit (step A203
;N) determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204). Since the special figure game process number does not shift until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number in this way.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing ends. When the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Then, the winning counter is set to "0" (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206).

When there is no input to the special winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207).
) And effect command setting processing (step A208). Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A21).
4).

When it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214) and the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
When the value of the winning prize counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A215).
When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing It is determined whether it is in progress (step A216).
When the small hit remaining balls are being processed (step A216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and when the small hit remaining balls are not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is the big winning. It is added to the mouth count number (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning mouth count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9") (step A218).

When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219).
), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A220), and it is determined whether or not the small hitting process is being performed (step A221). When not being processed during the small hit (step A221)
;N) ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process and is in the process of a small hit (step A).
221; Y) saves the value of the small hit opening operation end in the special winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number are “0” (step A301).
In step A301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number are not both “0” (step A301; N), a flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for a total of 1 pending numbers). Then, (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A303).
When it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A3
03; Y), a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step A).
304), effect command setting processing (step A305), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306), and special figure normal processing is ended. At this point, the special figure 1 reservation number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, a command (decorative special figure reservation number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value is prepared.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is not the variation in special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the current variation is the variation in special figure 2, the number of pending special figure 2 is dealt with. A decorative special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), effect command setting processing (step A308) is performed, special figure 2 variation start processing (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended. At this point, the special figure 2 reserved number is not updated by -1, but in step A307, the command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decorated special figure reserved number command).
To prepare.

When it is determined in step A301 that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started ( If the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A310) (step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed.
Then, "0" which is related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A314),
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure normal process is ended.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A306) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 56, first, the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1
) Is saved in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A321),
The big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variable display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting processing (step A) relating to the setting of special figure 1 stop design (design information)
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting related to the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) of setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process of setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 5
The initial value (for example, 52 msec) of the blinking period of 1) is saved (step A333).
), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special symbol 1 variable symbol number area (step A334)
, The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

As shown in FIG. 57, first, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (step A341), and the second
The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step A) relating to the setting of special figure 2 stop design (design information)
343), after performing special figure information setting processing (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, various kinds of settings relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 5
The initial value (for example, 104 msec) of the blinking cycle timer 2) is saved (step A35).
3), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special symbol 2 variable symbol number area (step A354).
), the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 58 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process).
322). In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A361), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A363), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (
The number for holding 1 is cleared to 0 (step A364). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A365) for determining whether or not it is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

When the result of the jackpot determination process (step A365) is a jackpot (step A366; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A362 (step A367). ), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. The small hit determination process (step A368) is performed.

When the result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit flag area in which the deviation information is saved in step A361 is overwritten and saved. (Step A370), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not the small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed with the deviation information saved in both the big hit flag 1 region and the small hit flag region. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the first
The result of the special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “off”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process).
342). In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM (
A big hit random number is loaded from the number for holding 1 and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A372). In addition, the number of holding 1
The term “use” is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 2). After that, the jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A374)
I do.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A371 (step A375). ), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 is saved while the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2.
The setting process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, jackpot flag 1 setting processing, and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A38).
1), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A36).
In the case of 5), the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382;
Since Y) is a small hit or a loss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit judging process is the big hit judging process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, and if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), it is out. Therefore, "other than big hit (out)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), it is judged whether or not it is in the high probability state (step A383).

If it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If it is not in the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ..

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A357), and the big hit judgment process is ended. Specifically, the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A36).
If it is 5), the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386;
Since Y) is a small hit or a loss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, and if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), it is out of alignment. , “Other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the big hit judgment process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 61 shows the small hit determination processing (steps A166 and A368) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing and large hit flag 1 setting processing. In this small hit judgment process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (
Step A391). In addition, the small hit determination is performed using the same random number as the big hit determination (big hit random number). That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value.
The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is the deviation, the deviation is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is the deviation, the deviation is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is ended.
When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N
), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A394).
, The small hit determination process ends.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 62, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above).
323). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1
The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A4
02). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step A403), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and saved in the special design 1 stop design number area (step A404). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step A405), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts when the hit occurs, and the destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes depending on the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol). In addition, of the big hits in special figure 1, a particular big hit pattern (for example, 4
If it is R probability variation pattern), depending on whether or not the game state is in probability variation, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the destination production mode is a special production mode in which the probability variation is fixed or whether it is probability variation. It is decided whether or not to shift to a different production mode. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and when it is a small hit (step A411; Y).
Loads the small hit symbol random number from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol design table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
After that, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the off stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. It saves (step A417) and prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop pattern pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special drawing command in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419),
An effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 63, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process)
343). In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2
The big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A4
32). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A434). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. It saves in the data area (step A438), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then, (step A441), a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Then, save the decoration special drawing command in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443),
An effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446), and the special figure 2 Stop the symbol setting process.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variation winning prize). It constitutes a variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37). In addition, the game control device 100, the determination means (
It constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A173, A324, A344) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and special figure 2 variation start processing will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low/high probability, with/without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. Production mode, depending on the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress of the special map variation display game, etc.
One effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes.

In the special figure information setting process as shown in FIG. 64, first, the first-half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453),
The offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A4
55), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 area is saved with the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of holdings is large when the number of holdings is large. Therefore, in cases other than the case where the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuations. It should be noted that the fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns.When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
..
Then, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step A459),
The offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Then, the latter half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A4
61), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of pending calls only in the case of failure (reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of pending calls is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and variation pattern setting processing (steps A174, A326, and A346) at the time of starting special figure 2 variation will be described. The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern that is the variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state and the second half variation that is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A471), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired, and prepared (step A471). A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A473).
.. In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different for hitting and for deviating. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the hit occurrence rate, and even 1 byte is sufficient, so the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of 2 bytes is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviating is higher than the rate of occurrence of hitting, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for deviating is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out (step A474),
If it is out (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A4)
75) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477. If it is not out (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, and step A477 is performed.
Process shifts to.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, the distribution processing (step A479) is performed, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and the latter half variation number area is saved (step A480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is changed from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holding 1).
Is loaded and prepared (step A484). After that, the distribution process (step A485
) Is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and the first half variation number is saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Distribution processing]
In FIG. 66, the distribution processing (step A476,
A479, A485). The distribution process is performed by selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or selecting the latter half variation selection table from the latter half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 2. In the processing for selecting the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game based on the variation pattern random number 3 from the first half variation selection table. is there.

In this distribution process, first, the first data of the target selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A477, or the former half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A483) It is checked whether is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A2201). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are at least one of the latter half fluctuation selection table, the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (
Although a predetermined distribution value is stored in association with the first half variation number), in the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

Then, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2).
202; Y) is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2
207), and the distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A22).
02; N) acquires one distribution value first defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) (step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A473, A478 or A484. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is acquired (step A2203).
) Then, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in step A2205 of the previous time (step A2204), and the calculated new random number value is "0".
It is determined whether it is smaller than (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table). Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).
Then, in step A2205, it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (
(Step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution processing ends.

[2-byte sorting process]
67. In FIG. 67, 2-byte allocation processing (step A
475). The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution processing, first, the first data of the selection table (the latter half variable group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (that is, "0").
Is checked (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), since distribution is not necessary, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

If the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307) and 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if the leading data of the selection table (latter half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the one distribution value initially specified in the selection table (latter half variation group table) is acquired. Yes (step A2303).

Then, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value prepared in step A473 (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step A23
04), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A23).
05). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2305; N
) Is updated to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), and then step A23.
Then, the process proceeds to step 03 and the subsequent steps are performed.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305 to obtain a new distribution value. Calculate a random number value (step A2304)
, It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2305).
..

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table).
Then, in step A2305, if it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (
(Step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A2307), and the 2-byte distribution process ends.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 66 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG.
Although they are basically the same, the program instructions for calculation are different because the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A327 and A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492),
The first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (
Step A500). Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (
(Step A501), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Furthermore, the variable order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A506),
The fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern and a stop information command including information about extending stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is the big hit symbol pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, as the processing number, "2" relating to the processing during special figure display is set (step A605).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). further,
A signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of change of the special figure 2 (for example, during changing of the special symbol 2) Save the signal OFF in the test signal output data area (step A
608), the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output is executed in the external information terminal (step A).
609). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610). ), as a control information of the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A611), and the special figure changing process is ended.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM's Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and it is a big hit (step A70).
5; Y), a test signal (for example, a condition device operating signal is turned on, a character continuously operating device operating signal is turned on, which is related to the start of the big hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 big hit),
The special symbol 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not the jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot ((
If it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit (step A706; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory device is ON, and the accessory character is ON) regarding the start of the big jackpot (the special jackpot 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game. Signal is ON during continuous operation device is ON, signal per special symbol is ON)
The data is saved in the M test signal output data area (step A707), and the processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. The number of rounds is saved in the round upper limit value area (step A710). Next, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LE of the RWM is obtained.
The data is saved in the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting processing (step A71).
Perform 3). After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Continuously, the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process
The fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A716), and effect command setting processing (step A717) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with a payout (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1 (4R probability change (probability))), and there is no jackpot (the jackpot) Opening information is a big prize opening information 1 (
4R probability change (probability)), it will be ON if there is a big hit in the time saving state, and will be OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit is a big hit and is OFF when the big hit is a big hit.

After that, the big winning fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 470 m) corresponding to the state of the winning probability opening information and the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure changing display game and the special figure changing display game.
0 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the special opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the special opening opening information is awarded. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72).
3). After that, the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724
) Is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A72).
5; Y), the time reduction variation number update processing (step A726) and the production mode information check processing (step A727) relating to the production mode setting are performed, and the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state. It is determined (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special map is not high (step A728; N
), load the decoration special drawing command from the decoration special drawing command area and prepare (Step A
729) and effect command setting processing (step A730). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and the effect command setting process (step A73).
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is high (step A72
8; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
In 0, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but in order not to make the player aware of the occurrence of the small hit, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure displaying processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not the small hit (step A725; N), the time shortening variation number update processing (step A735) and the effect mode information check processing regarding the effect mode setting (step S725) A736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. It may be (rotation speed), or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
In step A738, when it is determined that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741).
) Is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the effect command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), special figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing prefetch production from being performed a few rotations before the production mode is switched. By transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, production is performed across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions from occurring.

[Time reduction change count update process]
Next, the time reduction fluctuation number updating process in the above-mentioned special figure displaying process (step A726,
Details of A735) will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the time shortening variation number update processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) is present (step A751). When it is in the special figure high probability (step A751; Y), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step A751; N), it is determined whether or not time saving is in progress (step A752). Then, when it is not during the time saving (step A752; N), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. In addition, when it is in time saving (step A752; Y)
Updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (step A753), and the number of time reduction fluctuations is "0".
It is determined whether or not (step A754).

When the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is not "0" (step A754; N), the processing of updating the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is ended. In addition, when the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0” (step A75
4; Y), a signal relating to the end of time saving (for example, 2 signals for big hit is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF), and the test signal output data area Save.

Next, the number without saving time is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), the universal figure low probability flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Save low probability & no time saving flag (step A759)
). Next, a signal related to a left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and a right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display portion 57) is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the effect mode information check process in the above-mentioned special figure display process (step A727).
, A736) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 73, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A77).
1). When the next mode transition information is the code without update (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special figure variation display games that have been executed, for example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. ..

If the next mode transition information is not the no-update code (step A771; N), the production remaining rotational speed, which is the executable number of times of the special figure variation display game until the production mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , It is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed is “0” (step A
773). When the effect remaining rotation speed is not “0” (step A773; N),
The production mode information check process ends. In addition, when the remaining rotational speed of the production is "0" (
(Step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A774). Step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), and the effect remaining rotational speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired,
The effect mode is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (step A677), the next mode transfer information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and saved in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (step A678). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A780; Y), that is, when the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check processing is ended.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A782). Perform effect command setting processing (step A782).
Next, prepare the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining speed.
Step A783) and effect command setting processing (step A784) are performed.
Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787).
If it is not in the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process ends. If the mode is left-handed (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), effect command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and effect mode information check processing ends. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the switching of the effect mode is announced in advance before the specified number of rotations. By managing the effect mode in the game control device 100 in this way, it becomes possible to perform control such as generating a specific reach only in the specific effect mode, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-described special figure displaying processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” relating to the fanfare/interval processing is set (step A791), and the special figure game processing number area is processed. The number is saved (step A792).

Next, save the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (big hit + small hit), big hit 4 signal is ON (big hit is output)) in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1
Fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 Fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, normal symbol 1
Save high probability state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A794)
.. In addition, even in the special figure high probability, since the general figure only changes the probability state, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the normal electric auditors product 1 open extension state signal are always turned off. After that, clear the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A
795), save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A796),
The universal figure low probability flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, in order to clear the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A798) and turn off the gaming status display LED (third gaming status display section) provided on the gaming board 30 relating to the display of the high probability status, the high probability notification flag area Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed. The time reduction variation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are established.

Then, save the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (step A803),
The effect remaining rotational speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal related to the right-handing instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806).
), in order to turn on the indicator LED (for example, the second game status display unit) during right hitting, save the number under right hitting in the game status display number 2 area (step A807), and perform fanfare/interval processing The migration setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure displaying process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing 1, first, "7" relating to the small hitting fanfare processing is set as a processing number (step A811),
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A812).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (big hit + small hit is output. )) in the external information output data area (step A)
814), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared (step A816), and the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, the signal regarding the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the indicator LED (for example, the first gaming state display portion 57) during the right-handed operation is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Next, details of the fanfare/interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). , Production command setting processing (step A903) is performed.

After that, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), short open (
The special winning opening opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for the second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A907), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting processing (step A909).
To complete the fanfare/interval processing.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the special winning opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A908), transfer process during special winning opening opening process (step A908)
909) is performed to end the fanfare/interval processing.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the big hit pattern, 16R probability variation A (all long open)
, 16R probable B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 4R probable change (All short open)
Is set. The probability change is a big hit that the probability state after the special game state ends is a high probability state, and the normal is a big hit that the probability state after the end of the special game state is a low probability state. Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, 16R probability variation A data and opening switching determination value “0”, 16R probability variation B data and opening switching determination value “4”, 16R normal A data and opening switching determination value “0”, 16R normal B data, open switching determination value “4”, 4R probability variation data and open switching determination value “0” are stored in association with each other. A long opening operation is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, and a short opening operation is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[Transition setting process during special winning opening]
FIG. 77 shows the special winning opening opening process transition setting process (step A909) in the above-described fanfare/interval process. In the process for setting the process for opening the special winning opening, first, the process number is set to "4" related to the process for opening the special winning port (step A91).
1), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A912). afterwards,
Save the signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric auditors 1 operating signal is ON) in the test signal output data area (step A913), and store the number of winnings in the special winning opening. The information in the count number area is cleared (step A914). Then, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process is ended.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the special winning opening opening process, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001).
If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and It is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the obtained open switching determination value (step A1004).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005), Prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (
Step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening opening processing is ended.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N)
Save the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006) and prepare an interval command (step A1007).
, Effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening opening processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008).
An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step A1009), and the effect command setting process (step A101).
0) is performed, the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening opening processing is ended.

[Prize winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 79 shows the special winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011) in the processing during the opening of the special winning opening. In this special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening/closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, OFF data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A102).
3), the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing ends.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A)
1101; N) sets a special winning opening operation determination table (step A1102), acquires an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (step A1103), and sets a normal interval time (for example, 0. 1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the obtained open switching determination value (step A1105), and if the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A).
1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening release information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that notifies that the subsequent round will be a short open round. Specifically, as a big hit pattern, 16R probability variation A (all long open),
16R probable variation B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open)
, 16R normal B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open) is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from the big hit round 1R to 3R. Then, the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round. The selected jackpot pattern is 16
In the case of R probability change A or 16R normal B (all long open), it is informed that the long open will continue in the round continuation notification effect, and the special winning opening is opened with the long open even in the fifth and subsequent rounds. If the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variation B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), rank down effect is performed in the round continuous notification effect and short open is performed. This is notified, and the special winning opening will be opened with a short opening in the rounds after the 5th round.

When the special winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank-down performance system (step A1106; N), the processing moves to step A1109. Further, when the special winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process moves to step A1109. If the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (
Step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, set an interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) (Step A1108), and
The processing moves to 1109. Note that the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, for example, 4R and 8R.
You may provide multiple types like this.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed to perform the special winning opening remaining ball processing. To finish.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1)
101; Y) loads the flag from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1111), and loads the loaded flag, the special winning opening release information, and the stop symbol pattern. Set the ending time corresponding to (Step A11
12) The set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113). After that, the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1
114) is performed, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

[Fanfare/interval interval processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 81 shows the fanfare/inter-interval process shift setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described special winning opening remaining ball process. In this fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number "3" relating to the fanfare/interval processing is set (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1121). A1122).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (for example, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A112).
3) The fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing 2 is ended.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 82 shows the big hit ending process shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-described special winning opening remaining ball process. In this big hit ending process shift setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit ending process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). After that, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (for example, the signal during the operation of the special electric auditors product 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information of the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), the information of the upper limit number of rounds area that stores the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area that stores the flag for determining the round number upper limit value is cleared (step A113).
7) Then, the information in the special winning opening opening information area that stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit ending processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit ending process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time has a high probability after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the high probability data is set when the state is set (step A1201).

When it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202), and when it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203). ), the probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A1204), and the command setting process (step A12).
05) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, by referring to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Furthermore, the effect remaining rotational speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotational speed area (step A1208),
Next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

After that, prepare a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (step A1210),
The command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and the command setting process (step A1212) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit ending process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 84 shows the big hit end setting process 1 (step A120) in the big hit end process described above.
2) is shown. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the general figure high probability & general electric power support flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, the probability information command (
Time saving) is saved (step A1225), the time reduction variation number initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the time reduction variation number area (step A1226), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the initial value of the number of time saving changes (for example, 100) in the time saving number of times region, the time saving state is ended by executing the special figure changing display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 85 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A120) in the jackpot end process described above.
3) is shown. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and a signal regarding the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the general figure high probability & general electric power support flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (
High probability) is saved (step A1235), the time shortening variation number area is cleared (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state ends, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the state becomes short until the next special result mode is derived.

That is, the game control device 100, after the end of the special game state, a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is opened is extended for a predetermined period that is set in advance.
It constitutes a specific game state generation control means capable of generating.

[Special figure normal processing migration setting processing 2]
FIG. 86 shows the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (step A
1219). In the special figure normal process shift setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). ..

After that, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, one big hit signal is OFF, three big hit signals are OFF, and four big hit signals are OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1).
243), a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, the condition device operating signal is OFF, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 per signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 per signal is OF
F) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Then, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of big hits is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1248), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249). To finish.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, during the small hitting fanfare in the above-mentioned special figure game processing (step A15)
Will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 87(a), in the small hitting fanfare middle processing, small hitting middle processing shift setting processing (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit mid-process shift setting process (step A1301) in the above small hit fanfare mid process will be described. As shown in FIG. 87(b), in the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, "8" relating to the small hit medium processing is set as a processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing. Save in the number area (step A131)
2).

Next, the opening time of the special winning opening in the small hit game (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening/closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information of the special winning hole count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1316), and the small hit operation initial value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit mid-control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit mid processing shift setting processing ends.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the small hitting process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, in the small hit medium processing, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”).
It is determined whether or not the above (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not greater than or equal to the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting movement transition setting process (step A1404) is performed to make a small hit. The hitting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is greater than or equal to the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is within the special figure high probability. It is determined whether the flag is a flag (step A1406).
). In this way, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit in the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in effect.
When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the high probability of special figure (step A1406; Y)
), the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit mid-processing is ended. If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1406; N), the command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. Small hit remaining ball processing transfer setting processing (
Step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium processing is ended.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting movement transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hitting process will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit operation transition setting process, a branch process (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (control pointer during small hit).

In step A1411, if the control pointer is "0", "2", or "4", the wait time (eg 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412), Off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process ends.
If the control pointers are "1", "3", and "5" in step A1411, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is ended.

Here, in the case of this embodiment, after a small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, 200 m
Opening of seconds and closing of 1500 msec are performed alternately, and the control pointer during small hit is sequentially updated at the end of opening and at the end of closing.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hit midway control pointer is updated to "0", and At the end of the first 1500 msec closure (ie 2 from the first 1500 msec closure)
At the time of switching to the 200 msec opening for the second time), the control pointer during the small hit is updated to "1",
The control pointer during small hit is updated to "2" at the end of the second 200 ms opening, and the control pointer during small hit is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, and is set to 200 for the third time.
The control pointer during the small hit is updated to "4" at the end of the opening for m seconds, and the control pointer during the small hit is updated to "5" at the end of the third closing for 1500 milliseconds. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the control pointer during small hit is updated to "6", and after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 msec, the small hit occurs. The condition ends. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 msec and the closing of 2000 msec, the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transfer setting processing]
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A140) in the above small hit processing.
The details of 9) will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, "9" relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as a processing number (step A142).
1) The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing ends.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 91A, in the small hit remaining ball process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, in the above-mentioned small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A15)
01) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 91(b), in the small hit end process transition setting process, first, "10" relating to the small hit end process is set as a process number (step A).
1511), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512).
).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric auditor 1 working signal is turned off). To the test signal output data area (step A1514).
).
Next, the information of the special winning opening count area is cleared (step A1515), the information of the small hit midway control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0) (step A1516), and the small hit end processing transition setting processing is ended. ..

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit ending process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, in the small hit ending process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to a high special figure probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
When the loaded flag is not the flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N
) Sets the effect mode information address table (step A1603), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), and the effect remaining rotational speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired,
The effect mode is saved in the effect remaining rotational speed area in the RAM (step A1606), the next mode transfer information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and saved in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (step A1607). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1610). Production command setting process (step A1611)
)I do.
Next, prepare a production rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining production rotation speed (step A161).
2) Perform effect command setting processing (step A1613).
Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616).
), if the mode is not left-handed (step A1616; N), step A1619
Process shifts to. If the mode is left-handed (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and the effect command setting process (
After performing step A1618), the process proceeds to step A1619.

Then, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619).
), it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to special time saving (during time saving) (
Step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag relating to special drawing time saving (step A1620; Y)
The special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit ending process is ended.
If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special time saving and shortening (step A1620)
, N), a signal related to a left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621), and a right-handed display LED (for example,
In order to turn off the first game state display portion 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A1).
623) is performed, and the small hit end processing is ended.

[Special figure normal processing migration setting processing 3]
Next, the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A162) in the above-mentioned small hit completion process.
Details of 3) will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the special figure normal process shift setting process, first, "0" relating to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1631), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. It is saved (step A1632).

Next, a signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, 1 signal of the big hit is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal related to the end of the small hit (eg, A).
Save the special symbol 1 small hit signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A1)
634).
Next, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is ended.

[Production command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
When the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the production serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N),
Write the command data (MODE) to the production serial transmission buffer (step A2003
).

Next, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004).
, It is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the production serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N),
Write command data (ACTION) in the production serial transmission buffer (step A20
06), the production command setting process ends.
Note that the effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Design fluctuation control processing]
In FIG. 95, the symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the special figure game process described above.
), the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the later-described universal figure game process is shown. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and ordinary symbols (general symbols) and setting display data of the special symbols and ordinary symbols.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, one of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the general symbol) is changing (step A2).
101). In the case of the present embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, step B14, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 ( Address for stop), display table 1
The address (for fluctuation) is defined.

When the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (step A2102; Y)
Acquires the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A21)
03). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process ends.

If the updated blink control timer is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blink control timer initial value corresponding to the target blink timer area is saved (step A2106).
The variable symbol number of the controlled object is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the controlled object is acquired (step A2108).
Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111).
), and ends the pattern variation control process.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102)
;N) acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A
2110), save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step A21).
11), the symbol variation control process ends.

As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A2106, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, the first
A value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of the special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game) In, the value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value, and the value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the variation control table of the universal figure (general figure variation display game). This blinking control timer initial value is the interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the varying time.

The corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1. ) Is updated in sequence. In steps A2108 and A2111, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. By performing the above, the display is repeated once.

Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the first special symbol (first special symbol variation display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 7. Therefore, the special figure 1 changing display that is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the first special figure changing display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern eight times. Further, 2 is defined as the variable symbol number upper limit determination value in the variable control table of the second special symbol (second special symbol variable display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 changing display that is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the second special figure changing display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. Further, 4 is defined as a variable symbol number upper limit determination value in the variable control table of the universal symbol (general symbol variable display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 3.
Therefore, the general figure changing display that is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the general figure changing display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

In this way, by defining the blinking control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 make one round. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the universal figure game process, first, a gate switch monitor process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a universal electric prize switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number. A process of setting the general-purpose game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the universal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general figure game processing number is “0”, the start of variation of the general figure variable display game is monitored, and the setting of variation start of the general figure variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the variation of general figure are in progress. An ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
When the figure game process number is "1" in step B7, a figure figure changing process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

In step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "2", and if the result of the universal figure variable display game is a hit, the universal battery open time is set according to whether or not the state is in a time saving state. Alternatively, the processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the processing for a general figure.
Further, in step B7, if the universal figure game process number is "3", the process is continued during the universal figure hit, or the information necessary for performing the ordinary ball remaining ball process is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

If the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B12) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the universal figure end process.
Further, in step B7, when the figure/universal figure game processing number is "5", the per-universal-university-person ending processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the figure/universal figure ordinary processing is executed.

After that, after preparing a universal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure display (step B14), a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure display (step B15) ) Is performed to end the general-university game processing.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, when it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described general-university game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 97, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not it is in a game state of right-handing (for example, during a big hit, during a small hit, during special time saving (during normal power support)). (Step B1
02).
If the game state is right-handed (step B102; Y), the number of reserved universal figures is acquired and it is determined whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, "4") (step B105).
If the game is not in the right-handed gaming state (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of universal figure holdings is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved universal maps is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (step B105; Y), the number of reserved universal figures is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of retained universal figures is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted, and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of universal figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process, first, during the ordinary figure winning, that is, when the ordinary figure changing display game is in the hit state, the ordinary changing winning apparatus 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, when the normal drawing is in progress (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y).
), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated count value of the general electric power counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and the count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B204; Y).
If it is determined, the value of the operation end (for example, "4") is saved in the control pointer area during the universal figure hit (step B205), the universal figure game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206),
The ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process ends. That is, if there is a prize winning over the upper limit in the hit state of the universal figure, the hit state of the universal figure ends at that point.

Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the drawing is not hitting (step B201; N
), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or if it is determined in step B204 that the universal electric count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B204; N). Ends the ordinary pay prize switch monitoring process.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the normal/universal figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal figure reserved number is "0" (step B301). When the normal/universal figure reserved number is "0" (step B201; Y) )
Performs the ordinary figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step B321), and ends the ordinary figure normal process. In addition, when the general figure reservation number is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM per random number storage area (for reservation number 1), per symbol random number storage area (for reservation number 1) ( Step B302), hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), hit symbol random number storage area (hold number 1)
0) is cleared (step B303), and the probability that the hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability (ie, low probability of universal figure) is in the high probability of universal figure, that is, It is determined whether it is in a time saving state (step B304).

If it is not during the high probability of universal figure (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value at the time of low probability of universal figure (low probability lower limit judgment value) is set (step B305), and if it is during the high probability of universal figure (step B).
304; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B306).
After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307), and if the value of the hit random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307; N), the value of the random hit number is set to step B305 or B306. It is determined whether the value is less than the lower limit determination value set by (step B3
08).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B3
08; Y) saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (step B309), sets the deviation stop symbol number (step B310), and saves the deviation symbol information in the general figure stop symbol information area (step B311). , The stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B
312), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B313), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B314). ), the stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of low probability of universal figure is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of high probability of universal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”.
Therefore, at the time of low probability of universal figure, there is a deviation when the value of the random number per hit is "0" to "250".
Further, at the time of high probability of universal figure, the case where the value of the random number per hit is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number per hit is "0" is out of range.

After saving the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), and the empty area after the shift is set to 0.
It is cleared (step B318), and the number of universal figure reservations is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, a process of moving up the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 one by one. I do. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area Will be done.
Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.
Then, the routine change process transition setting processing (step B320) is performed, and the routine figure normal processing ends.

[Purpose normal processing migration setting processing 1]
In FIG. 100, the general/universal/universal/universal/universal process transition setting process 1 (step B32)
1) shows the general/universal-process/normal-process shift setting process 1 (step B508) in the process of displaying general-purpose image to be described later. In the general/universal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for transitioning to the general/universal figure normal process (step B331), and the process number is saved in the general/universal figure game process number area (step S331). B332). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the regular electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the universal figure normal process shift setting process 1 is ended.

[Usually changing the processing during the transition process]
In FIG. 101, the process of setting the transition to the universal figure changing process in the universal figure normal process described above (step B32).
0) was shown. In this routine figure changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the routine figure changing process (step B341), and the process number is saved in the routine figure game process number area ( Step B342).
After that, the figure change time (for example, 500 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, the figure change time is common between the figure low probability state and the figure high probability state) in the figure game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 variation signal is ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and vary the universal figure variation display game. The during-change flag indicating that it is in the middle is saved in the universal figure change control flag area (step B345).
Then, the blinking control timer initial value (here, 52 ms), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area (step B346), and the universal figure changing process transition setting process is performed. To finish.

[Processing during fluctuations in general]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B9) in the routine figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the process of changing the public figure, a process of setting the transition to the general figure display (step B401) is performed.

[Processing transition setting process during normal figure display]
Next, in the above-mentioned general figure changing process, the general figure displaying process shift setting process (step B401).
) Will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 102(b), in the process of setting processing for transferring general figure display, first, a process number is set to "2" as a setting process for transferring to processing for displaying general figure (step B411), and the process is executed. Save the number in the universal figure game processing number area (step B4).
12). Then, the figure display time (600 msec, for example), which is the display time of the figure change display game result on the figure display, is saved in the figure game processing timer area (step B413).
), a signal relating to the end of fluctuation of the universal figure (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the universal figure fluctuation display game is stopped Is saved in the general figure fluctuation control flag area (step B415), and the general figure display processing transition setting process is ended.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, details of the general figure displaying process (step B10) in the above general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or deviant information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM is executed.
The hit flag area is cleared (step B502), and it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the normal figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the process of displaying the normal figure is ended.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hitting process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer (for example, "0" ,” “2”, or “4”) is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the universal communication opening time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B506). After that, the process shift setting process during the normal drawing hit (step B21
1) is performed, and the process of displaying the universal figure is ended.

[Purpose per medium processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 104 shows a process of setting transition to normal figure processing transition processing (step B507) in the above-described processing of displaying a general figure. In the process of setting processing for hitting ordinary figure hitting, first, "3" is set as a processing number for shifting to processing for hitting ordinary figure (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the figure figure processing number area. (Step B512). After that, the test signal output data is a signal related to hitting the universal figure variation display game (for example, a normal symbol 1 hitting signal is ON) and a signal related to the start of the universal electric actuation (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON). The data is saved in the area (step B513), and the ON data is saved in the ordinary solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary solenoid (step B514).

Further, the information of the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 during the ordinary electricity fraud monitoring period is stored in Hoden. The information in the illegal prize number area is cleared (step B516). Then, the flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing transition setting process during the per-universal figure end is completed. To do.

[Usually hit processing]
Next, details of the during-universal-game hitting process (step B11) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 105, in the processing for hitting a universal figure, first, a control pointer for hitting a universal figure is loaded and prepared (step B601). It is determined (step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer in the normal figure is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; N
) Updates the control point during hitting the universal figure by +1 (step B603), performs a normal power operation shift setting process (step B604), and ends the process during hitting the universal figure.
In addition, when the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is equal to or larger than the upper limit value (step B602; Y)
Does not perform the process of updating the normal/universal figure hitting process control pointer area by +1 in step B603, but performs the normal electric power operation shift setting process (step B604), and ends the process of hitting universal figure.

[Uden operation transition setting process]
In FIG. 106, the normal power operation shift setting processing (step B60
4) is shown. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and is a control pointer (control pointer during normal drawing).
The process is branched according to the value of. In the normal power operation shift setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612,
In order to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, the wait time after the closing of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B612).
), in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area (step B613), and the normal electric operation shift setting process ends.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened. The ordinary electric opening time, which is the opening time, is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B614), and the ON data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B615). The normal operation shift setting process ends.

When the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616, the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is ended, and the normal ball remaining ball process is performed. Therefore, the process number is "4".
Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B617), and the ordinary electric ball remaining processing time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B619). After that, in order to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the ordinary electricity operation shift setting process is ended.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, the wait time is 200 m in step B612.
In step B614, 1700 msec is saved as the normal battery opening time, and in step B618, 600 msec is saved as the normal battery remaining ball processing time.
Further, when the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "4" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "500 msec" is acquired as the universal power release time.
Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, since the normal battery open time is "500 msec", the normal battery (normal variation winning device 37) is opened for 500 msec, and then the control pointer during the normal drawing is "4". Therefore, the normal electric ball remaining sphere processing time of 600 msec is set.
If the universal figure stop symbol is the "hit symbol 2", "2" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "1700 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time.
Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec elapses, the universal communication open time is "1700 msec", so the universal communication is released for 1700 msec.
The wait time of 00 msec is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the universal figure, so that the general electric vehicle is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer during universal figure is updated to "4". Therefore, a processing time of 600 msec is set for the normal electric ball remaining ball processing time.
If the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 3", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "1700 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time.
Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec elapses, the universal communication open time is "1700 msec", so that the general electric power is released for 1700 msec.
A wait time of 00 msec is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the universal figure, so that the general electric vehicle is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer during universal figure is updated to "2". Therefore, the wait time of 200 msec is set, and then the control pointer in
The POD is released for 1700 msec because it is updated to "3", and then the POD remaining ball processing time of 600 msec is set because the control pointer during POD is updated to "4".

[Universal residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the normal electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-mentioned general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 107(a), in the normal electricity remaining sphere processing, the per-university-university-end processing shift setting processing (step B701) is performed.

[Universal figure end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the per-universal-university-end-process transition setting process (step B70) in the above-mentioned normal electric ball remaining ball process.
Details of 1) will be described. As shown in FIG. 107(b), in the per-universal-diagram end process transition setting process, first, the process number "5" relating to the per-universal-diagram end process is set (step B711).
), the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B712).

After that, the universal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example,
The signal indicating that the ordinary electric auditors product 1 is operating is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the ordinary electric count number area for counting the number of prizes to the ordinary variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). .. Then, the control pointer area during hitting the universal figure is cleared (step B716), and the ending processing shift setting process for hitting the universal figure is ended.

[End processing per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the per-universal-drawing end process (step B13) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 108A, in the per-universal-drawing end process, the per-universal-drawing normal process shift setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Purpose normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the general/universal-university/normal-process transition setting process 2 (step B80)
Details of 1) will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(b), in the universal figure normal process shift setting process 2, first, a process number "0" relating to the regular figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is assigned to the universal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, a signal relating to the end of hit of the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 hit signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the regular variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (the flag during the fraud monitoring period) is saved in the regular electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the general/universal process shift setting process 2 is ended.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above.
) Will be described in detail. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator, the special figure 2 hold indicator, the general figure hold indicator, the first game state display section, the second
Settings related to the driving of the segment LEDs that form the game status display unit and the round display unit are performed.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the segment LED edit processing, first, the blink control timer is set to +1.
It is updated (step S501), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing depending on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 (step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that it is the output on timing, and
Creating a blinking cycle of seconds.
If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure reservation number display table 1 of the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure reservation indicator is specified is set. (Step S503), if the output is not on timing (Step S502; N)
Sets the public figure reservation number display table 2 (step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved universal figures is acquired from the set number-of-maintenance-universals display table and saved in the segment area of the universal figure reservation indicator (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the number of reserved universal figures is any of "0" to "2", the display data is the same regardless of which of the general figure reserved number display tables is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output on timing (step S506), and if it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reserved number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserved indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 reserved number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when the output is not on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 2 is set ( Step S508).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number display table is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reserved display (step S509).

After that, it is determined whether it is the output on-timing (step S510), and if it is the output on-timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined If the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 of the tables 1 and 2 is set (step S511) and it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2
The reservation number display table 2 is set (step S512).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reserved number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reserved indicator (step S513).
Furthermore, set a round display table that defines the display mode on the round display section (
In step S514), the display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515).

Next, when a time saving state occurs, the second gaming state display section 58 is turned on to notify the occurrence of the time saving state.
The game state display table 1 in which the display mode is defined is set (step S516), the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit (step S517). ). In the present embodiment, the first game state display unit consisting of one LED is turned off during normal operation and turned on during special time saving (during normal power support).
After that, the gaming state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second gaming state display unit is defined to notify that the gaming state is more advantageous in the right-handed state than in the left-handed state is set (step S518).
), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display section (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display section consisting of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left hitting), and right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during a big hit, a small hit, and normal power support). ) Is configured to be lit.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether magnetism is detected (step S601).
). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (
In step S602), it is determined whether the timer has timed out (step S603).
.. In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S
604), the magnet irregularity notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S6).
06), prepare a magnet fraud flag as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and judge whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S6).
13). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to "0". And
It is determined whether the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is "0" (step S610). Even if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step S603; N), step S
The processing moves to 609.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the injustice notification period has ended or is incorrect from the beginning. If the notification has not been made, a command for ending the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S
612), it is determined whether the prepared magnet irregularity flag matches the value of the magnet irregularity flag area (
Step S613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (step S614), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends.
Here, “step S601; N”→“step S608”→“step S609”→
“Step S610; Y”→“step S611”→“step S612”→“step S613;Y” is a normal route.

[Board radio frequency monitoring process]
Next, details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121, It is determined whether the board radio sensor 62 is on, that is, in a state where an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701;
Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a board radio wave irregularity notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio wave irregularity flag is prepared as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is set to a value in the board radio wave irregularity flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, in the case of board radio fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is detected once. At that point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the panel radio sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio fraud notification timer that defines the radio fraud notification time is set to "0".
If not, -1 is updated (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is not "0" (step S706; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave injustice monitoring process ends. In addition, when the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period has ended or is incorrect from the beginning. If the notification has not been made, a command for ending the radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S70).
7) Prepare a board radio wave fraud cancellation flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S708),
It is determined whether the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing ends. If the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag does not match the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S710), and the effect command is issued. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave irregularity monitoring process is ended.
Here, "step S701; N" → "step S705" → "step S706; Y"
->"stepS707"->"stepS708"->"stepS709;Y" is a normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information edit processing, payout command transmission processing (step S105)
, Winning hole switch/state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
112), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave irregularity monitoring process (step S113), information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement center internal management device or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer. Perform processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the external information editing process, first, if the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S801; N) and the body frame opening error is not occurring (step S802; N), , OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
When the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is stored. The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is started in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809) and step S810. Process shifts to. Also,
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process of step S809 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S810. ..

Then, when the magnet illegality is occurring (step S810; Y), when the board electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S811; Y), and when the frame electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S81).
2) Y), when the illegal call is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is output as external information. Save in the data area (step S816), save the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step S817), and step S818.
Process shifts to. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the occurrence of magnet fraud (step S810; N), the occurrence of board radio fraud (step S811; N), nor the occurrence of frame radio fraud (step S812; N).
If the normal electric fraud is not occurring (step S813; N) and the special winning opening is not occurring (step S814; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step S815), the process proceeds to step S818.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (step S819).
)I do.
Next, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S820). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S821).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S822), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time has not expired, save the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S823), and the external information editing process ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process (step S818).
Will be described in detail. In the main prize ball signal editing process, the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in the case of the present embodiment) This is the process of outputting to the device.

As shown in FIG. 114, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), the main prize ball signal output count is "0".
Is determined (step S833).

Then, when the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is not "0" (step S833; N), the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is set in the main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is, for example, 128 ms for the ON state (for example, high level) and OFF time (for example, 64 level) of the main prize ball signal.
msec) and the on-state time (128 msec, for example). After that, save the on data that turns on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (
(Step S837), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is “0” (step S833; Y), OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832: N
) Determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step S).
836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. In addition, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step S8)
36; N) saves the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

In this embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of payout game balls reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 sets the payout number of game balls to 10. The main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output as many times as the updated (set) number of outputs.
With respect to the main award ball signal output for each schedule, since the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payouts. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, even if the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc. and the payout is done after the big hit ends, the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning wins Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting gate signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S841). The minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output frequency is "0" (step S843).

Then, when the number of times of starting port signal output is not "0" (step S843; N), the number of times of starting port signal output is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting port signal output control timer is set in the starting port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). This starting port signal output control timer initial value is the time (for example, 128) of the ON state (for example, high level) of the starting port signal.
It is the on-state time (for example, 128 msec) of the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 msec). Then, the ON data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
When the number of times the starting port signal is output is "0" (step S843; Y), OFF data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843). (S848), the starting port signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846).
.. The fact that the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port signal output control timer is not "0". If the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-port signal output control timer is not in the output-on section (step S846; N), off data for turning off the start-port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( (Step S848), the starting port signal editing processing ends.

Next, the effect in the game and the control by the effect control device 300 for controlling this effect will be described. 116 and 117 show an example of effects in the special game state. here,
The case where a 16R sure variation B jackpot including a short opening occurred was shown.

After the big hit result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game, the fanfare production according to the big hit type is performed as shown in FIG. 116(a), and then the round game is started. As shown in FIG. 116(b), the display device 41 has a round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds,
A symbol display 41b for displaying a big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, a right-handing instruction display 41c for instructing a right hit, and an acquired game ball number display 41d for showing the number of award balls acquired by long opening are displayed. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 116(c), when a game ball is won in the special variable winning device 38 in a long-opening round and wins a prize ball, the number of prize balls is displayed as the prize ball number display 41e. , Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and the interval is reached, the interval effect is performed as shown in FIG. 116(d). Since the next round is also long open, an interval effect for long open is performed here.

Further, when the round game progresses and becomes a mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected, the mode transition is performed as shown in FIG. 116(e). The selection screen 41f is displayed. In the mode transition selection screen 41f, the first
It is possible to select a normal mode that forms a mode and a delay mode that forms a second mode, and the player operates the effect buttons 25 and the touch panel 29 to move the cursor that imitates a finger for selection.

Further, in the round interval effect that may be short-opened from the next time, that is, in the interval effect after the end of 4R here, the round continuation effect 41g for notifying whether or not the long-opening will continue is performed after the next time. .. In this round continuation effect 41g, FIG.
As shown in ), the letters “short” and “long” blink alternately, and the result is shown by the letters that finally light up. Here, it is announced that the jackpot type is 16R probability variation B, so it will be short open. Has been done. Further, when it is notified that the short opening will be performed, an interval effect is generated as shown in FIG.
As shown in 17(b), a promotion effect 41h for urging the player to aim at the special variation winning device 38 is performed. In addition, for example, when the jackpot type is 16R probability variation A (all long open), the character "long" is lit up in the round continuation effect 41g to notify that it is long open.

As shown in FIG. 117(c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in the short open round. Furthermore, the highlighting effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variation winning device 38 is open is performed.
The highlighting effect 41i is displayed as if light is being emitted from the special variation winning device 38. The special variation winning device 38 is provided with a decoration means for performing decoration by light emission. The light emission timing, the light emission intensity, the light emission color, and the like are associated with the light emission mode by the decoration means and the display mode of the highlighting effect 41i. May or may not be synchronized.

In addition, when the round with short opening is started, apart from the acquired game ball number display 41d showing the number of award balls acquired with the long opening, the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j showing the number of award balls acquired with the short opening is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the number of rounds display 41a displays the number of remaining openings. Here, there are 12 rounds left, including the running round, and each round is released once, so 1 more
It is displayed as opening twice. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(d), when the short open round ends and the interval time comes, the promotion effect 41h continues, but the special variation winning device 38
The highlighting effect 41i that emphasizes the open state is once ended, and the highlighting effect 41i is restarted when the next round is started as shown in FIG. 117(e).

When the final round is finished, the ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 117(f) and 117(g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 117(f), the acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of award balls acquired by the long open, the short open acquired game ball number display 41j indicating the number of award balls acquired by the short open. 117 is performed, and a total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is performed as shown in FIG. 117(g).

In the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m, which is a display that suggests a probability state after the special game state has ended, is performed. The contents of this state suggestion display are different depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and as shown in FIG. 118, depending on the probability state after the end of the special game state (1)- The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. When the normal mode, which is the first mode, is selected as shown in FIG. 118(a), only the character (1) is selected in the high probability state, and the character (2) is selected in the low probability state. ) Character is selected. In addition, FIG.
When the delay mode which is the second mode is selected as shown in b), the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the selection rate according to the probability state. The probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as lines.

[Main processing]
In order to perform the above-described effects, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 119 and a timer interrupt process (not shown). As shown in FIG. 119, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1),
The CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an effect button input process (step C9) of creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is made, the process of changing the effect content is performed.

Then, the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal is set, and the LED by the player is set.
Hall/player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as change of brightness of liquid crystal and liquid crystal, volume is performed (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, a V blank interrupt (1/6)
When 0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching in later than 1/60 seconds. May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc.). C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed. Then, the initial operation process for setting the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed (step C20), the effect mode management process for managing the effect mode is performed (step C21), and the process for clearing WDT (step C8). Return to.

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 120 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202).
). When it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis operation is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in the main processing cycle unit.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Then, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
It returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. In this way, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed together. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 121 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y
), it is determined whether the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C2).
34).

When it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C232; C2
34; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235)
;; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (
In Step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (Step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to a big hit mid production, or a command for operation related to a small hit mid effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; Y), the big hit type command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information regarding the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (
Step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands ((
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot system command such as a hold number command or an error command (step C241). The single-shot type command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination like a symbol command and a variable type command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot type command (step C24)
1; Y), the single-shot system command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command ((
In step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C2)
44) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis processing.

The read-ahead variation system command and the read-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the read-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) that the special figure variation display game is not executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration start memory display and the like displayed on the display device 41 are performed in a manner different from the normal mode, or the display device 41 is rendered. It is an effect such as displaying. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 at the time of starting winning a prize It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-type commands and symbol-type commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 122 shows the single-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether or not MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261).
). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single-shot command processing is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), RA indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized is indicated.
It is determined whether it corresponds to the M initialization command (step C263). And M
When it is determined that the ODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263)
; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the single-shot system command process ends. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area required for initialization is initialized and R
Set AM initialization screen information. Further, RAM initialization scenario data is set in order to perform an effect when the RAM initialization is performed.

Further, when it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE outputs a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been recovered without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether or not they correspond (step C265). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery process is performed (step C266), and the single-shot system command process ends. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power outage recovery is set in order to perform an effect upon power outage recovery.

When it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y),
A customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command process ends. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting demonstration.

If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (
Step C269). Then, when the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y
), a special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying a decoration start memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed (step C270), and the single-shot system command process ends. When it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, if the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C272), and the single-shot system command processing ends. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information on the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

Also, in step C271, if MODE is not the special figure 2 hold (step C271; N
), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). And MOD
If E is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N).
For MODE, it is determined whether MODE is error/invalid (step C275). And MO
If the DE is error/illegal (step C275; Y), error/illegal setting processing is performed to perform corresponding processing such as error notification (step C276), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

Also, in step C275, if MODE is not error/invalid (step C275;
In N), it is determined whether MODE is the effect mode switching (step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching setting processing for performing effect mode switching processing is performed (step C278), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

If MODE is not effect mode switching in step C277 (step C277).
;N), MODE determines whether or not the symbol is stopped (step C279). And M
When the ODE is not the symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot system command processing is ended. When MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In the determination as to whether it is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the symbol stop command is the target of the currently changing special map.

If the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the single-shot command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special symbol is made (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends the single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The gaming state flag is a flag indicating the current gaming state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
In FIG. 123, the look-ahead symbol type command processing (step C244) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing is shown. In this prefetching symbol type command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetching pattern command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. Save in the prefetch symbol command area in FIG. 1 (step C302), set the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag (step C304), and finish the prefetch symbol system command processing.

When the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is,
If the received pre-reading symbol system command is related to special figure 2 hold, save the command in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 2 holding (step C303), the pre-reading variable command reception wait flag It is set (step C304), and the prefetch symbol type command processing is ended. The read-ahead variable command reception wait flag is set in step C304 because the read-ahead symbol command and the read-ahead variable command (read-ahead change pattern command) are set (pair).

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
FIG. 124 shows the look-ahead variable system command processing (step C246) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing. In this prefetching variable command processing, it is first determined whether or not the prefetching variable command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag set in the above-described read-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If the prefetch variable command reception is not waiting (step C31)
1; N) ends the prefetching variable system command processing. On the other hand, when the pre-reading variable command reception is waiting (step C311; Y), the pre-reading variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the look-ahead change command (look-ahead change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed. First, the process (step C313) of setting the look-ahead variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information is performed, and the special-drawing-type information of the starting storage corresponding to the read-ahead variable system command received this time and the relevant information A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the current number of reserved special types.

Next, with reference to the MODE conversion table that has been set, the sub prefetch change command MODE corresponding to the MODE of the prefetch change command is acquired (step C314). further,
The look-ahead variable ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the in-sub-look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the look-ahead variable command is acquired (step C316).

The MODE includes the information on the first half fluctuation, but the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE changes depending on the number of holdings at the time of judgment, so the judgment at the time of preliminary judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start The judgment result may be different depending on the time judgment. Therefore, in order to make it possible to easily and surely perform the prefetching notice effect processing without being affected by the number of holdings at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of holdings, and It is designed so that they can be handled commonly regardless of the number of holds. For example, if there is no reach and there is a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, or if there is no reach and there is a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding situation, The look-ahead notice effects are converted into MODEs classified according to the matters to be considered, so that the look-ahead notice effects can be easily and surely processed.

Further, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuations such as presence/absence of reach and type of reach.
The details of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT do not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in the normal reach, for example, the final stop symbol is set to be one stop before the reach symbol, one stop before the last stop, and a hit case.
There are various modes even for the same type of reach, and since the ACT corresponding to each of them is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system into the same ACTs, the number is reduced to reduce the processing load such as checking in the processing of the prefetching notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are other than 0 (step C31).
7). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not 0 (step C317; N),
Since this is an abnormal command value, the read-ahead variable system command processing ends. On the other hand, the converted MO
If both DE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and the pending number (step C318).
), the prefetch command matching check process (step C319) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

As a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), if the command combination is not normal (step C320; N), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. on the other hand,
When the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), the prefetch lottery process (step C321) for randomly selecting the execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

Then, when the prefetching notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the prefetching variable system command processing is ended. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C322; Y
) Determines whether or not the generated pre-reading notice production (that is, the pre-reading notice production selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C321)) is a production to be started immediately (step C3).
23). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead notice effect that is performed during execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect or a variation that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during display, a notice of a pending change for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the present time, and the like. As for the timing of starting the execution of the effect which is not started immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game is ended and the execution of the next special figure variation display game is started. The timing to be performed is applicable.

If the effect does not start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetching variable system command processing ends. In this case, the advance notice is set at the time of starting the special figure variation display game that executes the prefetch advance notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead notice effect is set (step C324), and the look-ahead variable system command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
In FIG. 125, symbol-based command processing (step C in the received command analysis processing described above).
240). In this symbol type command processing, first, the special symbol type corresponding to MODE (
Either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is set (step C351), the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved (step C352), and the symbol command processing is ended.

With the symbol type, there is a deviating symbol, 16R certainty variation A big hit symbol, 16R certainty variation B big hit symbol, 16
It is a category of symbols such as R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R probability variation big hit symbol, small hit symbol, etc., and is associated with ACT data. Since the ratio of symbols changes between special figure 1 and special figure 2 (probability of change is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and there are multiple symbol type setting tables corresponding to MODE data. Is selected and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set by referring to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 126 shows the variable command processing (step C in the received command analysis processing described above).
236). In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is the information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

If the special figure type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (
(Step C362), it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (Step C
363).

If the variation command and the symbol type are not compatible (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing ends. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63; N) determines the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlying symbols, 16R probability variation A jackpot symbols, 16R probability variation B jackpot symbols, 16R normal A jackpot symbols, 16R normal B jackpot symbols, 4R probability variation jackpot symbols, small. There are hit patterns. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the production is performed as if the variation command (variation pattern command) of the outlier is received, but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A big hit symbol is received. It means a combination that is inconsistent above (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366).
). Here, the state of changing the special map indicates that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, a fanfare, or the like). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process is ended.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 127 shows the variation effect setting process (step C36) in the above-described variation system command process.
5) is shown. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is variation without reach (step C381). When the variation pattern type is the reachless variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code and the special figure type and the presentation mode at that time is set (step C382). In addition, since there is no reach variation, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and it is not necessary to specifically refer to the symbol type here. The effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300,
Naturally it depends on the model, but here there are low accuracy mode, probability variation mode, time saving mode and latent mode. Furthermore, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 are different in each mode.

Next, by referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types to be reserved is acquired (step C383).
.. With this, in the case of variation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery content of the notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of holdings. After that, the first-half notice distribution group table is used to perform a lottery for the notice that appears during the first-half change (step C386).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice. The preliminary announcement lottery that appears in (1) is performed (step C386).

Next, the notice production of the second half change is drawn. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (a combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure becomes a big hit. Is stopped and is variably displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The latter half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the latter half notice distribution group table.
Then, the address of the latter-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the latter-half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second-half notice distribution group table is used to change the latter half (during reach). A lottery for advance notice will be made (step C389).
).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390),
The contents of the effect corresponding to the preliminary announcement lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, effects such as the variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game and main reach contents and the announcement are decided. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed by referring to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure variation display game and the notice content (step C392).

Next, an operation substitution process is performed to set another movable effect member to operate instead of the movable effect member that has a malfunction in the initial operation (step C393). Details of the operation substitution process will be described later. Then, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C394), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (step C395). By these processes, the effect and advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above can be executed. Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special map type is performed (step C396). In this process, the setting of decreasing the decoration special figure starting memory display is made corresponding to the decrease in starting memory corresponding to the start of the special figure changing display game.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C397), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C398). Further, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game separately from the variable display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type. (Step C39
9), and ends the variable effect setting process.

[Big hit type command processing]
FIG. 128 shows the big hit system command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this big hit system command processing, it is first determined whether MODE is fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the design information (stop design number or stop design pattern). If MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare production setting processing for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big hit or small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set to fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit system command processing ends.

If MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. If the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number-of-rounds display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set to "in-round" (step C406). The big hit command processing ends.

If MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting effects during the interval is performed (step C408), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminates command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command regarding the ending after the end of the final round.

When MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), for example, when the high probability state is reached after the special game state is ended, the screen information for notifying that the high probability state is set is set, and the big hit ends. An ending effect setting process for setting screen information corresponding to the later game state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set to ending (step C412), and the big hit system command process is ended. If MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C).
413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening count command based on a winning of the special variation winning device 38.

When MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the big hit system command processing ends. When MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to the winning of the special variation winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit system command process is ended.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 129 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this fanfare production setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is a short open round in which the openable time is a predetermined time or less (step C421). In the present embodiment, the openable time is 0.2 seconds in the short open round, and the openable time is 29 seconds in the long open round.

If it is not a short opening round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long opening round, the acquired game ball counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (
(Step C422), the display setting of the acquired game ball number display 41d based on the acquired game ball number counter is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is ended. The winning game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the long open round, and in step C422, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning is updated. The updated value is displayed in step C423.

In the case of a short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquisition game ball is based on the short opening pattern counter. Set the display of the number display 41j (Step C
425), and ends the count effect setting process. The short opening pattern counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening round. In step C424, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning is added and updated. The updated value is displayed in step C425.

As a result, the number of winnings to the special variation winning device 38 in the long opening and the number of winnings to the special variation winning device 38 in the short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the effect control device 300 is a winning determination unit that determines whether the winning of the special variation winning device 38 is in the first opening mode (long opening) or the second opening mode (short opening). Eggplant Also,
The effect control device 300 determines the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) and the special opening mode of the second opening mode (short opening) based on the determination of the winning by the winning determination means. It constitutes a counting means for separately counting the number of prize balls based on winning in the variable winning device 38.

[Fanfare production setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the fanfare production setting process (step C402) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In the fanfare production setting process, first, it is determined whether the ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal A or 16R normal B.

When ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431; Y), the big hit count is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display content of the big hit fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the big hit count (step C433). Note that the number of jackpots is cleared to 0 when the normal game state, which is neither a high probability state nor a time saving state, is set. That is, the so-called consecutive chan count is counted. Then, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is set (step C434), and it is determined whether or not the big hit includes short opening (step C435). When the short opening is not included (step C434; N), that is, when all the rounds are long opening, the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare production setting process ends. When the short opening is included (step C434; Y), the short opening big hit information is set (step C436), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process ends. ..

When ACT is not a big hit fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to the 4R probability variation (probability). When the ACT is an abrupt fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether or not the hit is from a continuous effect that is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the affirmative exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C439), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). The setting process ends. The sudden exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state becomes a high probability state after the special game state when the 4R probability change occurs in the low probability state, and therefore an effect to inform or suggest that effect is performed. Also, if the 4R probability changes in the high probability state, the high probability state will continue even after the special game state,
A presentation is made to inform or suggest that fact.

If the hit is from the continuous effect (step C438; Y), the affirmative effect to be executed is selected from among the affirmative effect patterns related to the current fluctuating effect (continuous effect) (step C440) and determined. The display setting for the sudden effect is performed (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. That is, in the case of the 4R probability change from the continuous effect, the effect related to the continuous effect is performed even in the special game state. Even in the case of the 4R probability change, the number of jackpots may be updated by +1.

When the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process ends. Also, A
When CT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether or not the hit is from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (
Step C443).

If it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit special effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C444), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). The production setting process ends. In the case of a small hit, there is no change in the probability state before and after the small hit. Therefore, in the small hit special effect corresponding to the probability state, an effect that informs or suggests that the probability state when the small hit occurs is maintained is performed.

If the winning is from the continuous effect (step C442; Y), the small hit effect to be executed is selected from the small hit effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C445), The determined small hit effect display is set (step C446), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process ends. That is, in the case of a small hit from the continuous effect, the effect related to the continuous effect is performed even in the special game state.

In the case of 4R probability variation or small hit from the continuous production, when the 4R probability variation or small hit is derived (at the end of the special figure variation display game that becomes a sudden probability or small hit), the 4R An effect indicating which is in the special game state based on the probability change or the small hit is performed. For example, the production in which the enemy character and the teammate character fight is performed as a continuous production, and the battle is not yet settled when the result mode is derived. Then, in the special game state, in the case of the 4R probability change, an effect that the ally character wins (probability effect) is performed, and in the case of a small hit, the enemy character wins an effect (small hit effect).

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this round effect setting process, first, a right hit instruction display setting is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether or not it is a special game state based on a small hit or a bump (4R probability change) (step C462).

When it is a special game state based on a small hit or a collision (step C462; Y), display setting of a small hit/a collision round effect is performed (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. If the special game state based on small hit or abrupt probability (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and the short open big hit information set in the case of big hit including short open rounds. It is determined whether there is any (step C464)
..

If there is no short open big hit information (step C464; N), that is, if it is a special game state only for long open rounds, display setting of the number of rounds is performed (step C465), and display setting of round effect of long open pattern. Is performed (step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long open pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, are set (step C467).

After that, it is determined whether or not it is a mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state can be selected (step C468). If it is not the mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process ends.
If it is the mode shift selection round (step C468; Y), the display setting of the mode shift selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is short-open big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including a short open round, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a predetermined value for the short open round (step C470). ). If the number of rounds is not the predetermined value for the short open round (step C470; N), that is, if the round is the long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

In addition, when the number of rounds is a predetermined value that is a short open round (step C470; Y)
That is, in the case of a short opening round, the display setting of the round effect of the short opening pattern is set (step C471), and the remaining opening number is calculated from the round number upper limit value information and the round number (step C472). Then, the display setting of the remaining number of times of opening, which is the number of times of short-opening, is performed (step C473), and the display setting of the emphasis effect for urging the player to win the special variation winning device 38 is performed (step C475). After that, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the highlighting effect, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, are set (
(Step C476), and ends the round effect setting process.

That is, in a short opening round, a small opening small hit or a 4R probability variation round, an effect different from the long opening round is performed. As described above, the special variation winning device 3
Since the game balls 8 can easily be retained in the opening/closing member 990, and the player can aim for the prize even if the player is shortly opened, an emphasis effect 41i that urges the player to aim for the prize is provided.

[Interval effect setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the interval effect setting process (step C408) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number, which is the BGM number of the long opening interval, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C481), and a big hit including a short opening round is performed. In the case of, it is determined whether there is short open big hit information (step C482).

If there is no short-open big hit information (step C482; N), that is, if it is in the special game state of only the long-open round, the interval effect setting process ends. In this case,
The long open interval as shown in 16(d) is set. Also, if there is short open big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including a short open round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). The predetermined value here is the number of the last rounds that will be opened long, and is 4 in this embodiment.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, if the round is to be opened shortly from the next time, display setting of the round continuation notification effect is performed (step C484).
), a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the round continuation notification effect, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C485), and the interval effect setting process ends. As a result, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b) is set.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not the predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). When the number of rounds is not larger than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, it is a case where the next round is a long opening, and the long opening interval remains set.

If the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting of the short opening interval is performed (step C487), and the sound number, which is the BGM number of the short opening interval, and the decorative lamp are used. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, FIG. 117(d)
The short-opening interval as shown in (4) will be set. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, the highlighting effect 41i may be performed in the same manner as during the round, or the interval-specific highlighting effect may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this ending effect setting process, first, the big hit type information, which is the big hit type information that triggered the occurrence of the special game state this time, is loaded (step C
491), the state suggestion display is set based on the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode (see FIG. 118(a)) (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether there is a mode shift flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode in the effect mode after the end of the special game state, which can be selected by the player.
In the first mode and the second mode, the contents of the state suggestion display 41m, which is a display indicating the probability state,
This is a production mode in which the production of the special figure variation display game is different. This effect mode can be selected on the mode change selection screen 41f displayed in the mode change selection round, and the player operates the effect buttons 25 and the touch panel 29 to make a selection.
Then, when the player selects the first mode, the mode shift flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode shift flag is set.

When there is no mode shift flag (step C493; N), that is, when the first mode is set, the process shifts to step C495. In this case, the state suggestion display set in step C492 is displayed. If there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, if the second mode is set, the state suggestion display based on the selection rate in the second mode (see FIG. 118(b)) is set ( Then, the process proceeds to step C494) and step C495.

After that, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the number of acquired game balls counter and the counter for the short opening pattern (step C495), and the display setting of the added effect based on the total number of acquired game balls is set (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), and the short opening jackpot information is reset (step C498).
, Ending effect setting process ends. Through the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. ..

FIG. 134 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. FIG. 134(a) to (c)
The right-handing instruction display 41c for instructing right-handing may be displayed so as to flow from left to right on the display screen as shown in FIG. In this case, the right hitting instruction display 41c is displayed in a flowing manner at a position where it does not overlap with the symbol display 41b displaying the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variable display game. Further, the right hitting instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping with the symbol display 41b, but the back side of the symbol display 41b is displayed so that the right hitting instruction display 41c will be displayed, and the symbol display 41 will be displayed.
b is always visible. The display other than the symbol display 41b, such as the number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds and the highlighting effect 41i, may or may not be hidden by the right-handing instruction display 41c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 134(d) to (f), a promotion effect 41h that urges the player to aim at the special variation winning device 38 may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variation winning device 38. In this case, when it overlaps with the symbol display 41b that displays the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variable display game, the promotion effect 41h is displayed on the back side of the symbol display 41b as shown in FIG. 134(d). However, the symbol display 41b is always visible. Further, the promotion effect 41h may be displayed so as to flow at a position not overlapping the symbol display 41b. It should be noted that the display other than the symbol display 41b, such as the number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the highlighting effect 41i, and the short open winning game ball number display 41j, may or may not be hidden by the promotion effect 41h. Is also good. In addition, the display for operating the right-handing instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 134(a) to (c) and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 134(d) to (f) are simultaneously performed. May be.

FIG. 135 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 135(a), the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning prize are used as a promotion effect 41h for urging the special variation winning device 38 to aim and an emphasis effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variation winning device 38 is open. Device 38
It is also possible to instruct to turn the operation unit 24 to the right or to aim at the special variation winning device 38 by using the image. This makes it easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variation winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly indicate which special variation winning device 38 should be aimed. Further, the light emitting mode of the actual special variable winning device 38 located on the lower right of the display device 41 and the light emitting mode of the image of the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized, and at first glance The special variation winning device 38 to be aimed at is known. Of course, the light emitting mode of the operation unit 24 may be similarly synchronized.

The image may be a schematic animation or the actual special variation winning device 38.
It may be a video of the. In addition, the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 3 displayed on the display device 41.
In the image of 8, the display may be performed in synchronization with the light emission effect on the actual operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38, but it is not necessary to perform the display. Further, the images of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be still images.

Further, as for the character information and the image of the arrow included in the right-handing instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h, a fluent display may be performed as described above. In this case, the operation unit 24
Alternatively, the front side of the image of the special variation winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side thereof may be moved. In addition, when the collective display device 50 is displayed on the images of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38, the display may be performed in synchronization with the actual display mode of the collective display device 50, or as a non-synchronized display. Is also good. When the display mode is not synchronized, any display mode may be used, but, for example, a state in which all the lights are turned on or off, or a specific lighting mode (in the case of 7 segments, a big hit such as “7”) is associated. A specific number is lit, and in the case of a set of LEDs, it is associated with a big hit as a unique lighting mode when a big hit occurs.

Further, when the game state of right-handedness is started, an image may be displayed to instruct the operation unit 24 to be turned largely to the right or to aim at the normal variation winning device 37. .. Further, when the left-handed gaming state is started, an image for instructing to turn the operation unit 24 to the right by a small amount or instructing to aim at the winning device 90 may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135(b), a remaining time display 41n for displaying the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. The end condition of the round that is satisfied in the case of short opening is almost always when the openable time elapses rather than when a predetermined number of game balls are won in the special variation winning device 38, and the round ends in a fixed time. To do. Therefore, when the subsequent rounds are shortly opened, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the time of the round until the end of the final round and the time of the interval. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give an impression different from the case where the number of remaining rounds is notified, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. That is, the remaining time calculation means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special game state is provided, and the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation means can be notified. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first open state is continuously opened for a predetermined time or longer, and the second open state is continuously opened for a predetermined period of time or less. Although it has been described as a short opening, the opening is not limited to this, and any opening may be used as long as the first opening and the second opening are different. Further, as the gaming machine, the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area has been described, but other gaming machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize in the auxiliary gaming device based on a prize in the starting area, and a so-called feather object that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball winning the auxiliary gaming device flows into a specific area. A game machine of (old 2 types) may be used.

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow down is provided, and the starting area (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32. 97) A variation display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variation display game is a special result. In the machine 10, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be prized, and the special variation winning device 38 that is converted into the open state in the special game state and the effect related to the game are controlled. With the production control means (production control device 300), the operation mode of the special variation winning device 38 in the special game state is a first opening mode (long opening) and a second opening mode different from the first opening mode. There is a mode (short opening), the effect control means, when the second opening mode is executed, it is possible to execute the promotion effect 41h that promotes the launch of the game ball toward the special variation winning device 38. Become. Therefore, suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state,
The interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the player operates the shooting operation unit (operation unit 24) for adjusting the launching force of the game ball, the display device 41 capable of displaying information regarding the game, and the special variation winning device 38 decorated with light. The decoration control means is provided, and the effect control means, as the promotion effect 41h, displays the operation method of the firing operation unit necessary for setting the firing force for firing the game ball toward the special variation winning device 38, and The display of the decoration mode of the special variation winning device 38 by the decoration means is performed on the display device 41. Therefore, the player can easily understand the contents of the promotion effect 41h.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is provided, and a starting area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) provided in the playing area 32.
A gaming machine 10 that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on winning of a game ball to a player, and generates a special game state that is advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be prized, and is provided with a special variation prize device 38 that is converted into an open state in the special game state, and a special variation prize in the special game state. The operation mode of the device 38 includes a first opening mode (long opening) and a first opening mode.
There is a second opening mode (short opening) different from the opening mode, and it is a winning determination that determines whether the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is the first opening mode or the second opening mode. A means (production control device 300) is provided. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the winning determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The special variation winning device 38 is configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38, and the special variation winning device 38 in the first opening mode based on the determination of the prize by the prize determining means.
It is provided with a counting unit (production control device 300) that separately counts the number of prize balls based on the winning of the prize and the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the second opening mode. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the counting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production related to the game is provided, and the production control means is based on the counting result by the counting means, and is a prize ball based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the first opening mode. It is possible to separately notify the number and the number of prize balls based on the winning in the special variation winning device 38 in the second opening mode. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify only a part of the counting result by the counting means and then notify the counting result which has not been notified at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the initial operation of the movable effect device when the power of the game machine is turned on will be described. The initial operation is for confirming the operation of the board effect device 44 that is a movable effect device, and the content of the initial operation is set according to the state of the detection sensor before the start of the initial operation. ..

[Initial operation processing]
FIG. 136 shows an initial operation process (step C) in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 119).
20). In this initial operation processing, it is first determined whether or not there is an initial operation flag (step C101). The initial operation flag is the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine.
The process is performed by saving the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized (step C7). That is, it is a flag that is set when the power is turned on.

If this initial operation flag does not exist (step C101; N), the process moves to step C108. If there is an initial operation flag (step C101; Y), the initial operation flag is cleared (step C102) and the state of the detection sensor is acquired (step C103). Then, it is determined whether all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C104).
The normal detection state is the detection state of the detection sensor when the movable production device is in the initial position,
All normal detection states are states in which all the movable effect devices are in the initial positions, and there is no abnormality in the state of the movable effect devices when the power is turned on.

When all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C104; Y), the initial operation table for performing only the normal initial operation is set (step C105), and the initial operation in-execution flag is set (step C107). When all the states of the detection sensors are not the normal detection state (step C104; N), the initial operation table for performing the special initial operation according to the detection state is set (step C106), and the initial operation execution flag is set. (Step C107
). The initial operation table is a table in which the execution contents of the initial operation are defined, and the initial operation is executed according to the contents of this table.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation executing flag (step C108), and when there is no initial operation executing flag (step C108; N), the initial operation processing ends. If there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C108; Y), that is, if the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether an abnormality is found in the initial operation being executed (step C109).
). When no abnormality is found in the initial operation being executed (step C109; N), it is determined whether all the initial operations are completed (step C113). If an abnormality is found in the initial operation being executed (step C109; Y), a malfunction error flag corresponding to the movable effect device in which the abnormality is detected is set (step C110), and the movable effect device of the concerned movable effect device is set. It is determined whether or not there is an alternative initial operation which is an initial operation performed in place of the initial operation (step C111).

If there is no alternative initial operation (step C111), the process proceeds to step C113. If there is an alternative initial operation (step C111), the alternative initial operation is set (step C112), and the process proceeds to step C113. Then, when all the initial operations are not completed (step C113; N), the initial operation processing ends. When all initial operations are completed (step C113; Y), the initial operation in-execution flag is cleared (step C1).
14) and the initial operation processing ends.

As described above, the detection sensor for detecting the operation state is provided corresponding to each movable effect device, and the detection state (normal detection state) in the state where each is in the initial position is as shown in FIG. 137. is there. If all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state shown in FIG. 137 before the start of the initial operation, the initial operation table shown in FIG. 145(a) for performing only the normal initial operation is set, and the initial operation is performed according to the initial operation table. Will be seen.

In this initial operation, the normal initial operation for returning the movable effect device from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position is performed for each initial operation group shown in FIG. 137. Priorities are set to the respective initial operation groups, and the initial operation is performed from the group A having the highest priority, and when the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the group B having the next priority is performed. Similarly, the initial operation of group C is performed after the initial operation of group B is completed. Then, when the initial operation of the group C is completed, the initial operation ends.

Specifically, first, as the initial operation of the group A, the initial operation of the central movable accessory unit 880 is performed. In this initial operation, the state in which each central movable member is in the initial position (see FIG. 13) is changed to the state in which each central movable member has moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 14), and then the state in the initial position (see FIG. 13). Perform the operation to return to (See). After the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800 is performed as the initial operation of the group B. In this initial operation, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 860 are in the initial position (see FIG. 9), and the movable member unit 820 is moved down to the operation completion position. (See FIG. 10), and the first upper movable member 848 is operated (
(See FIG. 11). Then, the operation of returning to the state (see FIG. 9) in the initial position is performed.

After the initial operation of the group B is completed, as the initial operation of the group C, the initial operation of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable accessory unit 730 is performed. In this initial operation, the second lower movable member 770 is in the initial position (see FIG. 7A).
To the state where the second lower movable member 770 has been moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 7B),
After that, the operation of returning to the initial position (see FIG. 7A) is performed. Furthermore, from the state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are in the initial position (see FIG. 6A), the first lower movable member 74 is moved.
0 and 741 are set to a state in which they have moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 6B), and then an operation of returning to the state in the initial position (see FIG. 6A) is performed. When the initial operation of this group C is completed, the normal initial operation is completed.

In addition, the operation of the movable effect device included in the group B includes vertical movement of the movable member unit 820, rotation operation of the first upper movable member 848, and swing operation of the second upper movable member 860.
Both are operations that may be executed in the game, but in the normal initial operation of group B, the swing operation of the second upper movable member 860 is not performed. The rotating operation of the first upper movable member 848 is an operation indicating that the player has higher expectations than the swinging operation of the second upper movable member 860, and is an operation that is executed less frequently. In the normal initial operation, it is confirmed whether or not the operation executed in the scene where the player's expectation is the highest can be executed so that the interest of the game is not spoiled in the scene.

The normal initial operation described above is performed in order from the group including the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large. That is, the area where the initial operation of the group A shown in FIG. 138(a) overlaps the display device 41 is the largest, and the area where the initial operation of group B shown in FIG. 138(b) overlaps the display device 41 is the largest. The initial operation of group C shown in (c) and (d) has the smallest area overlapping with the display device 41.

Further, in the initial operation of the group C, the first lower movable member 740 shown in FIG. 138(d).
, 741 and the initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 shown in FIG. 138(c), the initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 having a large area overlapping the display device 41 is performed first. .. By performing the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large first, when the display of the display device 41 is started after a lapse of a certain time after the power is turned on, the display content is not visible by the movable effect device. Can be prevented.

Performing the initial operation in this order is particularly effective when a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 139(a) shows an example in which a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure variation display game. In this example, first, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are executed, and the screen during the game as shown in FIG. 139(b) is displayed on the display device. In addition, since the variable display is being performed here, the decoration special figure variable display game display section 85 is displayed.
The second decoration game display unit 88 is in a variably displayed state. In addition, a production operation of operating the board production device 44, which is a movable production device, is possible as a production of the game, and the movable production device can be operated according to the production content.

When a power failure occurs while the special figure variation display game is running (t11), the game control device 100 interrupts the running special figure variation display game and performs backup processing to determine the state at the time of the power failure. Processing for holding is performed. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not have a backup function, the information of the decorative special figure variation display game being executed is lost. Further, the display device 41 is not displayed during the power failure. Furthermore, the production operation of the movable production device is disabled.

After that, when the power is restored (t12), the game control device 100 performs a process for restarting the game from the state at the time of the power outage based on the backed up information. Then, when the power is restored normally based on the backed up data, the power restoration command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the suspended special figure variation display game is restarted (t13).

The production control device 300 displays the initial screen shown in FIG. 139(c) on the display device 41 in response to the power failure recovery (t12). In addition, the initial operation of the movable production device is started when the power is restored. Then, since it can be understood that the power is restored based on the reception of the power outage recovery command, FIG.
A power failure recovery screen indicating that is displayed in d) (t13).

When the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends, the game control device 100 causes the effect control device 30.
Send a symbol stop command to 0. In the effect control device 300, since the information on the decorative special figure variation display game cannot be restarted because the information of the decorative special figure variation display game is lost due to the power failure, the power failure is restored on the display device 41 even while the special figure variation display game is running. The screen display continues. Since the end of the special figure variation display game can be grasped with the reception of this symbol stop command, the display of the screen during the game as shown in FIG. 139(b) is started and the result is displayed (t1.
4). As a result, the display is returned to the state where the game is normally played.
When the stop time for displaying the result has elapsed, a new special figure variation display game is started (t15).
).

When the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the restarted special figure fluctuation display game is short, the initial operation may end (t20) after the result display timing (t14) as in this example. A movable effect device may exist in front of the display device 41. However, by performing the initial operation in order from the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large, when the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed, the area in which the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device is reduced as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the result. Further, the importance of the information displayed in the power failure recovery is the lowest in the information displayed in the initial screen shown in FIG. 139(c), and then the information of the power failure recovery screen shown in FIG. 139(d). Is highly important, and the result information on the in-game screen shown in FIG. 139(b) is most important. Therefore, the visibility of more important information can be improved by sequentially performing the initial operation from the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large.

Further, from the viewpoint of enhancing the visibility of the result of the restarted special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display which is the display area of the decoration special figure variation display game located in the approximate center of the display area of the display device 41. You may make it perform an initial operation|movement in order from an operation|movement with a large area which overlaps with the game display part 85. Here, since the initial operation of the group B shown in FIG. 138(b) has the largest area overlapping the decorative special figure variation display game display portion 85, the priority order of the initial operation is set to the highest. Hereinafter, since the area overlapping with the decorative special figure variable display game display portion 85 becomes smaller in the order of the group C shown in FIGS. 138(c) and (d) and the group A shown in FIG. 138(a), the initial operation is performed in this order. Set so that the priority of is low. Accordingly, when the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed, the area in which the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device can be made as small as possible, and the visual confirmation of the result can be prevented.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of the start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a predetermined effect Movable effect device that performs an operation (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first
Central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920,
A fourth central movable effect member 930), a display device 41 capable of displaying an image related to a game, and an effect control device (effect control device 300) for controlling the movable effect device and the display device. It is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable rendering device based on power-on, and among the multiple types of operations included in the initial operation, the movable rendering device performs the operations in descending order of hiding the display device 41. Become. Therefore, it is possible not to disturb the visibility of the information displayed when the power is turned on.

In addition, a predetermined display operation is performed in a game machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result. A movable effect device, a display device 41 capable of displaying a decoration game corresponding to the game in a predetermined area, and an effect control device for controlling the movable effect device and the display device 41, and the effect control device is based on power-on. The movable effect device is configured to perform an initial operation, and among a plurality of types of operations included in the initial operation, the movable effect device sequentially performs an operation in which a predetermined area of the display device is hidden. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information displayed in the predetermined area from being visually recognized when the power is turned on.

Regarding the effect operation of the movable effect device, since the effect operation cannot be performed in the state (t12 to t20) in which the initial operation is being performed, the effect operation cannot be performed during this period. Further, in the effect control device 300, since the effect information set at the start of the special figure variation display game is lost due to the occurrence of a power failure, a game-related command including at least information that makes it possible to grasp the current progress of the game Until it is received, the effect operation of the movable effect device corresponding to the special figure variation display game cannot be performed.

In this example, a symbol stop command is received as a command related to the game after the power failure is restored (t14), but since the initial operation is being executed, at this time the effect operation of the movable effect device is left in a state where it cannot be performed. Then, after receiving the symbol stop command, the initial operation ends (t
20) After that, a variation command is received as a command relating to the game, and from this time, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled (t15).

That is, when a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game is restarted due to recovery, receiving a command related to the game after completion of the initial operation enables the effect operation. It becomes a condition. It should be noted that here, since there is a starting memory, the variation command of the next game is received, but if there is no starting memory, a customer waiting command will be received as a command related to the game after the end of the initial operation, and this customer waiting From the time when the command is received, the movable effect device is allowed to perform the effect operation.

[Performance operation permission processing]
FIG. 140 shows the effect operation permission process performed in the movable body control process (step C19) in the main process (see FIG. 119) in effect control device 300. In this effect operation permission process, first, it is determined whether an effect operation impossible flag indicating that the effect operation of the movable effect device is disabled is set (step C511). This production operation impossible flag is
Based on the power-on of the gaming machine, the process is performed in the effect control device 300 to save the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized (step C7). That is, it is a flag that is set when the power is turned on.

If there is no effect operation prohibition flag (step C511; N), that is, if the effect operation is possible, the effect operation permission process is ended. If there is a production operation impossible flag (step C511; Y), it is determined whether there is an initial operation flag (step C51).
2). This initial operation flag is a flag for instructing that the initial operation should be performed, and processing for saving the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized by the effect control device 300 based on power-on of the gaming machine (step It is set in C7). That is, it is a flag that is set when the power is turned on.

When there is this initial operation flag (step C512; Y), the effect operation permission process is ended. In this case, since the initial operation is to be performed from now on, the state in which the effect operation cannot be performed is maintained. When there is no initial operation flag (step C512; N), it is determined whether there is an initial operation executing flag (step C513). This initial operation in-execution flag is a flag that is set during the execution of the initial operation, and is set based on the initial operation being set based on the initial operation flag in the initial operation processing (see FIG. 136), and the end of the initial operation. Will be cleared by.

If there is this initial operation in-execution flag (step C513; Y), the effect operation permission process ends. In this case, since the initial operation is being executed, the state in which the effect operation cannot be performed is maintained. If there is no initial operation executing flag (step C513; N), it is determined whether or not a command relating to the game including information that allows the progress of the current game to be grasped is received (step C514). That is, if there is no effect operation flag and there is no initial operation flag and initial operation in-execution flag, it is determined whether a command related to the game has been received.

When the command relating to the game is not received (step C514; N), the effect operation permission process is ended. In addition, when the command regarding the game is received (step C514; Y
) Clears the effect operation disable flag (step C515), and ends the effect operation permission process. As a result, the rendering operation of the movable rendering device becomes possible.

141, in the example shown in FIG. 139, the end of the initial operation (t14) than the reception of the symbol stop command, which is a command including information that allows the progress of the current game to be grasped (t14).
The case where t20) is early is shown. In this case, until the symbol stop command is received after the initial operation is completed, the movable effect device is left in a state in which the effect operation cannot be performed (t20 to t14).
From the time point (t14) when the symbol stop command is received, the movable effect device is enabled for effect operation.

FIG. 142(a) shows a case where, in the example shown in FIG. 141, the result of the special figure variation display game interrupted by a power failure is a big hit. In this case as well, after the initial operation ends, until the symbol stop command is received, the movable effect device remains in a state in which the effect operation cannot be performed (t2.
0 to t14), from the time (t14) at which the symbol stop command is received, the movable effect device is enabled for effect operation.

FIG. 142(b) shows a case where, in the example shown in FIG. 139(a), the result of the special figure variation display game interrupted by a power failure is a big hit. In this case, the symbol stop command is received as a game-related command after the power failure is restored (t14), but since the initial operation is being executed, the production operation of the movable production device is left in a state where the production operation cannot be performed at this point. .. Then, after receiving the symbol stop command, the initial operation ends (t20), and after that, the fanfare command is received as a command related to the game, and from this time, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled (t30). That is, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the special game state. In FIG. 142(a) as well, the production operation of the movable production device may be enabled from the reception of the fanfare command, that is, the start of the special game state, not from the reception of the symbol stop command.

FIG. 143 shows a case where the symbol stop command is not received. When not receiving the symbol stop command, in addition to the case where the symbol stop command is not transmitted as a specification of the gaming machine, when the symbol stop command cannot be transmitted due to some abnormality, or when the transmitted symbol stop command is dropped included.

FIG. 143(a) is a case where the symbol stop command is not received in FIG. 142(a), and the initial operation is finished before the variable display and the result are displayed in the special figure variable display game. Is. Further, FIG. 143(b) is a case where the symbol stop command is not received in FIG. 142(b), and the initial operation ends in a state where the variable display is ended and the result is displayed in the special figure variable display game. This is the case. In any case, after the initial operation is completed, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the time when the fanfare command which is a command related to the game is received (t30), that is, from the start of the special game state.

As a command relating to the game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the production operation of the movable production device, in addition to the symbol stop command and the fanfare command, a variation command, a customer waiting command, a round command, an interval command, an ending command and Small hit fanfare command is mentioned. Based on the reception of these commands, effect control device 300
Can grasp the progress of the current game, and can set an appropriate effect operation. Even other commands may be commands relating to the game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the production operation of the movable production device, as long as the command includes information that allows the progress of the current game to be grasped. It is possible.

Further, the command relating to the game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the effect operation of the movable effect device, is a command set together with the update of the process number in one timer interrupt in the special figure game process shown in FIG. It can be said that For example, the symbol stop command is set by one timer interrupt in the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 69 (step A60).
1, A602) and the special figure game process number are updated (steps A605 and A606).

In addition, the power failure recovery command and the initialization command indicating the power-on of the gaming machine do not include information that allows the progress of the current game to be grasped, so one of the conditions for enabling the performance operation of the movable effect device is Although it is not included in the commands related to the game, which are one of the conditions that enable the performance operation of the movable effect device by including information that enables the progress status of the current game to be included in these commands It may be used as a command. In addition, even without including information that allows the progress of the current game to be grasped, the performance control device 300 sets an arbitrary performance operation (operation that is not linked to the progress of the game) based on this command. You may make it use a command as a command regarding a game which is one of the conditions which enable the production operation of a movable production device.

Based on the above, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a game that displays the result after the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined time is executed, and if the result of the game is a special result, a special advantage advantageous to the player is given. In a gaming machine that generates a gaming state, game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game based on information from the game control means. And a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 74) capable of executing an effect operation of controlling the movable effect member according to the progress of the game under the control of the effect control means.
1, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), and the game control means can retain information even in a power outage state, and can resume the game based on the information retained along with the restoration of the power outage. The control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on the restoration of the power outage, and the game control means interrupts the game when a power outage occurs during the execution of the game, and when the power outage is restored. When the power is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game with the special result, the effect control means restarts the game and restarts the initial operation of the movable effect device that started with the recovery of the power failure. If the game is finished by the end of the game, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the special game state. Therefore, the production operation of the movable production device can be performed as soon as possible after the power failure is restored, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. In addition, it is possible to prevent an inadvertent operation in the restarted game, prevent a contradiction in production, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, in the special game state, the operation can be performed as usual, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, when the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game with the special result, the effect control means ends the initial operation of the movable effect device started by the restoration of the power failure by the display of the result. In that case, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled after the start of displaying the result. Therefore, when the initial operation ends early, the effect operation can be started early, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

FIG. 144 shows an execution mode of the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player in the example shown in FIG. 142(b). As for the operation corresponding effect during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the execution timing and the effect content are determined at the start of the special figure variation display game, and are executed with the content determined according to the progress of the special figure variation display game. Has become. In the state before the power failure occurs, the operation corresponding effect is executed at the scheduled timing (t41 to t42). At this time, the operation facilitating image for prompting the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is displayed on the display device 41.

When a power failure occurs (t11), the effect control device 300 loses the effect information set at the start of the special figure variation display game. Therefore, at least until the command relating to the game including the information that allows the progress of the current game to be grasped is received, the operation corresponding effect cannot be executed, and the scheduled timing (t43 to t44, t45 to t46, t47). ~t
The operation corresponding effect in 48) is not executed.

After that, when a symbol stop command is received as a command related to the game (t14), it becomes possible to grasp the current progress of the game and execute the operation corresponding effect. The operation corresponding effect in this case is not determined at the start of the special figure variation display game, but the execution timing and effect content are determined based on the received command relating to the game, or the special figure variation display to be executed. The execution timing and effect contents are fixed regardless of the variation pattern of the game.

Here, the operation corresponding effect is executed at the timing when the result is derived in the special figure variation display game (t14 to t49). During the period in which the operation corresponding effect is executed, the operation promoting image is not displayed because the initial operation of the movable effect device is being performed. That is, the performance control device 30
0 is a flag that indicates that an initial action should be performed, and an initial action execution flag that is set during the execution of the initial action.
Do not display the operation prompt image. In addition, if the initial operation of the movable effect device is completed, the operation promotion image is displayed. That is, the execution mode of the operation corresponding effect is made different depending on whether or not the initial operation is being executed. Further, in the operation corresponding effect (t50 to t51) performed after the completion of the initial operation, the operation promotion image is displayed in the same manner as before the occurrence of the power failure.

It should be noted that the execution mode of the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game is made different depending on the presence or absence of the initial operation. It is also possible to change the execution mode for the operation-based effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, which can be executed regardless of the above.

For example, regarding the adjustment of the volume and the brightness, the display of the volume and the brightness value is displayed on the display device 41 according to the operation when the initial operation is not being performed, and the operation is performed when the initial operation is not being executed. The volume and brightness may be changed but the value may not be displayed. For those not related to the progress of the special figure variation display game, such as the adjustment of the volume and brightness, the adjustment may be made from the timing (t12) when the power failure is restored, or the timing (t13) when the display of the initial screen is finished.
) May be adjustable. Also, the adjustment may be made from the timing (t14) at which the command related to the game is received as in the operation corresponding effect corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game.

Further, when the initial operation is being performed, the operation corresponding effect may not be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 144, the operation corresponding effect is not executed from the occurrence of the power failure (t11) to the end of the initial operation (t20). Further, like the effect operation of the movable effect device, whether or not the operation corresponding effect may be executed until the initial operation is completed and a command regarding the game is received. In the example shown in FIG. 144, the initial operation ends (t20) from the occurrence of a power failure (t11).
Then, the operation corresponding effect is not executed until the fanfare command is received (t30). In FIG. 144, the command is a special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit, so the command related to the game after the initial operation is a fanfare command, but if the result is a special figure variation display game, start it. If there is a memory, the variation command of the next game corresponds, and if there is no starting memory, a customer waiting command corresponds.

Further, the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 may be operable under the control of the effect control device 300. For example, the state shown in FIG. 1 may be set as an initial position, and operation may be performed at a protruding position protruding upward from this initial position. When the power is restored, the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 are moved from the initial position to the protruding position and then returned to the initial position as an initial operation. The pressing operation may be accepted even when the operation corresponding effect is executed during the initial operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is the special result, the gaming machine that produces a state advantageous to the player controls the effect of the game. Means (production control device 300), a display device 41 which is capable of displaying information on a game under the control of the production control device, and a production operation of operating the movable production member under the control of the production control device according to the progress of the game. Executable movable production device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second
Lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 8
60, a first central movable effect member 900, a second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), and an operation unit including an operation unit that receives an operation from a player ( Effect button 25, touch panel 29), the effect control means can execute a predetermined operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means, and performs the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the restoration of the power outage. In this configuration, the execution mode of the operation corresponding effect is changed depending on whether or not the initial operation is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a contradiction or inconvenience of the production due to the operation corresponding production being performed at the same time as the initial operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by being confused with the initial operation. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the.

Further, the effect control means can execute the operation corresponding effect at a predetermined timing in the game, can display the operation promotion image prompting the operation of the operation means at the predetermined timing, and when the initial operation is being executed. That is, the operation promotion image is not displayed even at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction and inconvenience of the production due to the production of the operation corresponding to the initial operation.

Further, the effect control means does not execute the operation corresponding effect when the initial operation is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction and inconvenience of the production due to the production of the operation corresponding to the initial operation.

In addition, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a game is displayed in which the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then the result is displayed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is set. In the gaming machine to be generated, it is provided with effect control means for controlling the effect of the game and operation means having an operation part for accepting an operation from the player, and the operation means can operate the operation part under the control of the effect control means. The effect control means is configured to perform the initial operation of the operation unit based on the restoration of the power failure, and to accept the operation of the operation unit even during the initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the operation corresponding effect even during the initial operation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation, that is, if there is a movable effect device that is not in the initial position, an initial operation table that performs a special initial operation according to the detected state is set. Initial operation is performed. In this initial operation table, first, a special initial operation is performed on the movable effect device corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state. In the special initial operation, a return operation of returning the movable effect device that is not in the initial position to the initial position is performed. Then, with respect to the movable effect device that has performed this special initial operation, the normal initial operation is not performed. In other words, for the movable effect device that has performed the return operation, it is possible to confirm that the operation is performed by the return operation, so the initial operation is omitted, and at this point, part of the normal initial operation is omitted, and the time required for the initial operation is reduced. It can be shortened. That is, when the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is performed as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

After performing this special initial operation, the normal initial operation is performed for the initial operation group that does not include the movable effect device in which the state of the detection sensor is not the normal detection state. In addition, in the initial operation group that includes the movable effect device in which the state of the detection sensor is not the normal detection state,
For the initial action group having the movable effect device that was not the target of the special initial action, the initial action other than the movable effect device that performed the special initial action is performed. It should be noted that no initial operation other than this special initial operation is performed for the initial operation group in which the special initial operation has been performed for all the movable effect devices to which it belongs.

145(b) to (d) and FIG. 146 show an example of the initial operation table for performing the special initial operation. FIG. 145(b) shows an initial operation table when the seventh detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are not at the initial positions. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, the third central movable effect member 9
A return operation of returning the 20th and fourth central movable effect member 930 to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group B having the next priority order of the group A which is the initial operation group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that have performed the special initial operation.

After that, the initial operation of the group C is performed according to the priority order. Then, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, which are movable effect devices that perform the initial operation by returning to the group A having the highest priority, but do not perform the special initial operation in the group A. Only perform the initial operation. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, regarding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

FIG. 145(c) shows the initial operation table when the second detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a returning operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed. Next, since the group C which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that has performed the special initial operation has the lowest priority, the normal initial operation is performed by returning to the group A having the highest priority.

Next, the normal initial operation of the group B is performed, and the initial operation is performed only for the first lower movable members 740 and 741 which are the movable effect devices in the group C that have not performed the special initial operation. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, regarding the second lower movable member 770, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

Since the first lower movable members 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable accessory unit 730 which is the group C are configured to be driven by one drive source, one movable effect device When the special initial action is performed, it can be considered that the other movable effect device is also operable, and thus the other initial action may not be performed again. That is, in the example of FIG. 145(c), the first lower movable member 740 in the fourth execution order,
The initial operation of 741 may be omitted.

FIG. 145(d) shows the initial operation table when the fifth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the first upper movable member 848 is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a returning operation of returning the first upper movable member 848 to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C having the next priority order of the group B that has performed the special initial operation.

Thereafter, the group A having the highest priority is returned to and the normal initial operation is performed. Then, in group B, the initial operation is performed on the movable member unit 820 that is the movable effect device that has not performed the special initial operation. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, regarding the first upper movable member 848, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

When the eighth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second upper movable member 860 is not at the initial position, the returning operation of returning the second upper movable member 860 to the initial position may be performed. .. In this case, since the second upper movable member 860 does not operate in the normal initial operation, the group B performs the normal initial operation. Of course, it is not necessary to determine whether the eighth detection sensor is in the normal detection state. This is because the second upper movable member 860 only swings left and right, so that it does not affect the game even if it is not in the initial position.

When the special initial motion is performed as described above, the normal initial motion is sequentially performed for the initial motion group having the next priority order of the initial motion group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial motion. ing. Further, after performing the initial operation for the group C having the lowest priority, the process returns to the group A having the highest priority, and the initial operation is performed according to the priority until the initial operation is performed for all the movable effect devices.

Further, when the plurality of movable effect devices are not at the initial position, a returning operation of returning each of them to the initial position is performed. In this case, the restoration operation is performed one by one in descending order of restoration priority in the special initial operation shown in FIG. The restoration priority order is set in order from the one closest to the display device 41, and the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the third central movable effect member 920, which are closest to the display device 41, are set. The fourth central movable effect member 930 has a higher rank, and the farthest first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 have a lower rank.

In FIG. 146(a), when the sixth detection sensor and the seventh detection sensor are not in the normal detection state,
That is, the initial operation table when the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are not in the initial position is shown. In this case, first, a special initial operation (return operation) of returning the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 having the higher return priority to the initial position is performed, and after the special initial operation is completed, the return operation is performed. A special initial operation (return operation) of returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, which have lower priority, to the initial positions is performed.

Then, the normal initial operation is performed for the group B having the next priority order of the group A which is the initial operation group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that finally performed the special initial operation. .. Then, the normal initial operation of the group C is performed according to the priority order. In this case, since the special initial operation is performed for the group A, all the movable effect devices belonging to the group A are initially operated, and therefore the normal initial operation for the group A is not performed. That is, in this case, for the group A, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

In FIG. 146(b), when the seventh detection sensor and the second detection sensor are not in the normal detection state,
That is, the initial operation table when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not in the initial position is shown. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a special initial operation of returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 having a higher return priority to the initial position is performed, and after the special initial operation is completed, a return operation is performed. A special initial operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 having a lower priority to the initial position is performed.

Then, since the group C, which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that has finally performed the special initial operation, has the lowest priority, the group A having the highest priority is returned to perform the initial operation. For group A, the special initial operation of the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is performed, so the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that are not performing the initial operation. Only the initial operation of.

Next, the normal initial operation of the group B is performed, and the initial operation of the group C is performed. For the group C, since the returning operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed, only the initial operation of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 which are not performing the initial operation is performed. That is, in this case, for the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770, an initial operation is a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation. I am trying.

FIG. 146(c) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are not in the normal detection state, that is, when the movable member unit 820 is not at the initial position. Of the movable member unit 820, the movable member unit (left) that is the drive mechanism 806 that performs the left operation and the movable member unit (right) that is the drive mechanism 806 that performs the right operation are basically operated simultaneously. There is a need. Therefore, when both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 that detect these operation states are not in the normal detection state, first, as a special initial operation, the movable member unit (left) and the movable member unit (right). Are simultaneously operated to perform a returning operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position.

Then, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C having the next priority order of the group B which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit 820 that has performed the special initial operation. afterwards,
Returning to the group A having the highest priority, the initial operation is performed for all the movable effect devices according to the priority, but the special initial operation of the movable member unit 820 is performed for the group B, so the initial operation is not performed. The initial operation of only the upper movable member 848 is performed. That is, in this case, regarding the movable member unit 820, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

FIG. 146(d) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 is not in the normal detection state, that is, when only the movable member unit (left) is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a returning operation of returning the movable member unit (left) to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed on the group C having the next priority order of the group B which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit (left) that has performed the special initial operation.

After that, the group A having the highest priority is returned to the normal initial operation, and then the group B is
The normal initial operation of is performed. In the group B, the movable member unit (left) performs the special initial operation, but the movable member unit (right) and the movable member unit (left) need to be operated at the same time. Normal initial operation is performed.

That is, when one of the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 is not in the normal detection state, first, only the movable member unit (left or right) corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state performs the return operation. .. In this case, since the other movable member unit (left or right) is not subjected to the special initial operation, both movable member units (left and right) including the movable member unit (left or right) that has performed the return operation later are included. ) Normally performs initial operation.

Note that the return priority order is the order closer to the display device 41, but may be other orders. For example, when there are movable effect devices that interfere with each other, such as when the operation ranges overlap, the restoration priority order may be set so as not to cause a problem due to the interference. For example, when the two movable effect devices are not in the initial position and one of the movable effect devices returns to the previous operation, if the other movable effect device collides with the other movable effect device, the other movable effect device returns to the first operation. The return priority is set to be high so that

Further, the restoration priority order may be set such that the restoration operation is performed in order from the movable effect device having a large area overlapping with the display device 41. In the case of the present embodiment, since the area where the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 overlap with the display device 41 is the largest, the return priority is set to the highest. Hereinafter, since the movable member unit 820, the second lower movable member 770, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 overlap in this order with the display device 41, the area becomes smaller. It is set so that the return priority becomes lower in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation in which the display content cannot be seen by the movable effect device when the display of the display device 41 is started.

Further, the return operation is performed in order from the movable effect device having a large area overlapping the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 which is the display area of the decorative special figure variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the display device 41. The return priority may be set so as to perform. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable member unit 820 has the largest area that overlaps the display area of the decorative special figure variation display game, and thus the return priority is the highest. Hereinafter, the second lower movable member 770, the first lower movable members 740, 741, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930. Since the area overlapping the display area of the decorative special figure variable display game becomes smaller in order, the return priority order is set lower in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly eliminate a situation that hinders the visibility of the decorative special figure variation display game.

Further, as the decorative special figure variable display game, a first decorative special figure variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 provided in the approximate center of the display area of the display device 41, and 1 When executing a second decorative special figure variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the second decorative game display portion 88 which is provided at a position closer to the periphery of the display area than the decorative special figure variable display game, The return priority order may be set according to the area that overlaps only one of the decorative special figure variation display games, or the return priority order may be set in consideration of the overlapping areas of both the decorative special figure variation display games. You may do it. For example, when the second decorative special figure variable display game is displayed earlier than the first decorative special figure variable display game after the power is turned on, the second decorative special figure variable display game is restored depending on the area overlapping only the second decorative special figure variable display game. It is preferable to set the priority.

Also, when the special initial action is performed, the normal initial action is performed for the initial action group that has the next priority of the initial action group that includes the movable effect device that has performed the special initial action. It is not something that can be done. For example, after performing the special initial operation, the initial operation may be sequentially performed in the order of priority from the group A having the first priority. Also,
Immediately after performing the special initial action, the initial action may be performed for the initial action group including the movable effect device that performed the special initial action. Further, the initial operation may be performed from a group having many areas overlapping with the display area or from a group having many areas overlapping with the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85.

Next, the alternative initial operation performed when there is a malfunction during the initial operation will be described.
In the present embodiment, when there is a malfunction in the initial operation of the group B, it is possible to substitute another operation in the group B as the initial operation.

FIG. 147(a) shows the normal initial operation of group B. In this normal initial operation, first, in process 1, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 8 are included.
It is assumed that the movable member unit 820 is moved down to the operation completion position (see FIG. 10) from the state where 60 is in the initial position (see FIG. 9). Next, in step 2, the first upper movable member 848 is rotated (see FIG. 11), and in step 3, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 10). Then, in step 4, the movable member unit 820 is moved to the initial position (
(See FIG. 9).

In the normal initial operation of this group B, if there is an operation failure in which the movable member unit 820 does not descend to the operation completion position in the process 1, the operation failure error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set and the alternative initial operation is set. .. In this case, the alternative initial operation 1 shown in FIG. 147(b) is set. In this alternative initial operation 1, first, as a step 5, the first
The upper movable member 848 is rotated, and in step 6, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position. Then, in step 7, an operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. Note that step 7 is performed when the movable member unit 820 is in an operation failure that operates from the initial position but does not operate to the operation completion position, and is performed when the movable member unit 820 is an operation failure that does not operate from the initial position. Absent.

If there is a malfunction in which the first upper movable member 848 does not rotate in the process 2 of the normal initial operation of the group B or the process 5 of the alternative initial operation 1, the first upper movable member 84.
The operation failure error flag of No. 8 is set, and the alternative initial operation is set. In this case, the alternative initial operation 2 shown in FIG. 147(c) is set. In the alternative initial operation 2, first, the second upper movable member 860 is swung in step 8, and the second upper movable member 860 is returned to the initial position in step 9. Then, in step 10, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. It should be noted that step 10 is not performed when the movable member unit 820 is malfunctioning and does not operate from the initial position.

Further, when there is a malfunction in which the second upper movable member 860 does not swing in the process 8 in the alternative initial motion 2 of the group B, the malfunction error flag of the second upper movable member 860 is set and the alternative initial motion is performed. Set. In this case, the alternative initial operation 3 shown in FIG. 147(d) is set. In the alternative initial operation 3, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed as step 11. Note that the operation is not performed when the movable member unit 820 has a malfunction that does not operate from the initial position.

If there is a malfunction in any other process, it is treated as if there is no alternative initial motion. For example, when there is a malfunction in which the first upper movable member 848 does not return to the initial position in the process 3 of the normal initial motion, the malfunction error flag of the first upper movable member 848 is set, but the alternative initial motion is not set. No, go to step 4. Further, if there is a malfunction in which the movable member unit 820 does not rise to the initial position in process 4 of the normal initial motion, the malfunction error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set, but the alternative initial motion is not set. In this case, the rise of the movable member unit 820 may be abandoned and the initial operation of the group C may be performed, or an error notification may be performed and the initial operation may be stopped. It should be noted that the alternative initial operation may be performed immediately when there is a malfunction, or the alternative initial operation may be performed after retrying the operation that is malfunctioning several times.

That is, when the operation of rotating the first upper movable member 848 forms the first initial operation and the first initial operation cannot be normally executed, the second upper movable member 860 is swung.
This means that the initial operation is executed. When the first initial operation of rotating the first upper movable member 848 can be normally executed, the second upper movable member 860 is swung.
The initial operation will not be executed.

[Operation substitution process]
FIG. 148 shows the operation substitution process (step C393) in the above-described variation effect setting process (see FIG. 127). In this operation substitution process, when the above-mentioned alternative initial operation is performed, it is possible to replace the operation that has malfunctioned with the alternative operation. In this operation substitution process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect operation set as the effect such as the notice effect or the variable effect has the object of the operation failure error flag (step C501). The malfunction flag is set corresponding to the movable member that has malfunctioned in the initial operation. This indicates that the movable member to which the malfunction error flag is set cannot operate normally.

When there is no target of the operation failure error flag in the rendering operation (step C501; N), the operation substitution process ends. In addition, when there is a target of the operation failure error flag in the effect operation (step C501; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an alternative operation (step C502). In the alternative operation of this embodiment, when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning, the second upper movable member 848 is operated.
The operation of the second upper movable member 860 when 60 is operable corresponds to this. Further, the movable member unit 82 when the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are malfunctioning.
The operation of only moving 0 up and down is equivalent.

If there is an alternative operation (step C502; Y), the operation targeted by the operation failure error flag is replaced with the alternative operation (step C503), and the operation alternative process ends. If there is no alternative action (step C502; N), the action alternative process ends. That is, when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning and the effect operation for operating the first upper movable member 848 is selected, if the second upper movable member 860 is operable, the first upper movable member 848 is first. The operation of the second upper movable member 860 is performed instead of the operation of the upper movable member 848. In this case, when the second upper movable member 860 is also malfunctioning, only the operation of moving the movable member unit 820 up and down is performed. Further, when the movable member unit 820 is also malfunctioning, there is no substitute operation, and therefore the first upper movable member 848.
, The second upper movable member 860 and the movable member unit 820 are not operated.

Further, if the operation of the movable member is selected when the movable members other than the first upper movable member 848 are malfunctioning, there is no substitute operation, so the operation of the movable member is not performed. The operation of the movable effect device may be set as an alternative operation. For example, when the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, or the fourth central movable effect member 930 is malfunctioning, the movable member unit 820, the first
The operation of the upper movable member 848 or the second upper movable member 860 may be set as an alternative operation. Further, although the alternative operation is performed by the movable effect device, the display of the display device 41 or the LED is performed.
Alternatively, the alternative effect may be performed by, for example, emitting light or outputting audio.

In addition, when there are many operation modes, the third initial operation when the second initial operation cannot be executed normally or the subsequent initial operations may be set. Further, the normal initial operation and the alternative initial operation are the operations that may be executed in the game, but the operations that may not be executed in the game may be included in the initial operation.

In addition, instead of changing the effect once set in the action substitution process, if there is a malfunction error flag, select the effect using a table in which the action corresponding to the malfunction error flag is not included in the options. It may be done.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of the start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a predetermined effect Movable effect device that performs an operation (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first
Central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920,
A fourth central movable effect member 930) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control means performs the initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on. And a first initial operation and a second initial operation different from the first initial operation.
There is an initial operation. In the initial operation, if the first initial operation can be executed normally, the second initial operation is not performed, and if the first initial operation cannot be executed normally, the second initial operation is executed. It will be feasible. Therefore, the initial operation can be simplified, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened, and the game can be started quickly.

In addition, the first initial operation and the second initial operation are operations that can be executed in the game production,
The first initial motion is a motion that suggests a more advantageous state for the player than the second initial motion. Therefore, first, it is possible to confirm the operation regarding the operation suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state.

In addition, the production control means, in the initial operation, the first initial operation did not end normally,
When the operation corresponding to the first initial operation is selected in the game production when the initial operation ends normally, the operation corresponding to the second initial operation is replaced with the operation corresponding to the first initial operation. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the effect of the game and prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, in the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 136, when the operation failure occurs in the normal initial operation, the operation failure error flag is immediately set to set the alternative initial operation. If there is a malfunction in the normal initial operation before the set or the alternative initial operation is set, the normal initial operation or the operation for confirming the malfunction may be performed again as a retry operation. If no malfunction is detected in this retry operation, it is assumed that the malfunction occurs, and the malfunction error flag and the alternative initial motion are not set. In addition, when a malfunction is detected in the retry operation, the malfunction error flag is set or the alternative initial operation is set. Since the retry operation is performed, the alternative initial operation may not be performed.

The normal initial operation, the special initial operation, the retry operation, and the alternative initial operation are shown in FIGS.
In the operation referred to as the initial operation in the above, when the normal initial operation, the special initial operation, the retry operation, and the alternative initial operation are all completed, the initial operation is regarded as the end of the initial operation. The execution mode of the effect is determined.

Based on the above, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a game that displays the result after the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined time is executed, and if the result of the game is a special result, a special advantage advantageous to the player is given. In a gaming machine that generates a gaming state, game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game based on information from the game control means. And a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 74) capable of executing an effect operation of controlling the movable effect member according to the progress of the game under the control of the effect control means.
1, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), and the game control means can retain information even in a power outage state, and can resume the game based on the information retained along with the restoration of the power outage. The control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on the restoration of the power outage, and the game control means interrupts the game when a power outage occurs during the execution of the game, and when the power outage is restored. When the power is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game with the special result, the effect control means restarts the game and restarts the initial operation of the movable effect device that started with the recovery of the power failure. When the game is finished by the end of the game, if the abnormality is not detected by the initial operation, the production operation of the movable production device is enabled from the start of the special game state, and the abnormality is detected by the initial operation. In the case, the effect operation of the movable effect device is disabled even after the start of the special game state. Therefore,
If it can operate normally, the production operation of the movable production device can be performed as soon as possible after the power failure is restored, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent an inadvertent operation in the restarted game, prevent a contradiction in production, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, in the special game state, the operation can be performed as usual, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. In addition, when there is an abnormality, it is possible to deal with the failure of the gaming machine by disabling the operation.

Further, when the power failure is restored after the power failure occurs during the execution of the game with the special result, the effect control means ends the initial operation of the movable effect device started by the restoration of the power failure by the display of the result. In this case, when no abnormality is detected by the initial operation, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of displaying the result, and when the abnormality is detected by the initial operation, the result is displayed. Even after the start, the production operation of the movable production device is made impossible. Therefore, when the initial operation ends early, the effect operation can be started early, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In addition, when there is an abnormality, it is possible to deal with the failure of the gaming machine by disabling the operation.

Further, the production control means is configured to perform a retry operation when an abnormality is detected in the initial operation, and when no abnormality is detected in the retry operation, it is determined that no abnormality is detected by the initial operation. I have done so. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately determine the occurrence of the abnormality.

In addition, with regard to the movable effect device having different positions depending on the game state, the initial operation may not be performed depending on the situation. For example, in the case of a movable effect device in which the operation is controlled so that the probability state, which is one of the game states, is in the initial position in the low probability state and not in the initial position in the high probability state. Even if the initial state is not present when the power is turned on, if the production control device 300 can understand that the probability state is the high probability state, the initial operation including the special initial operation (return operation) is not performed. Then, the movable effect device may be kept at the same position. Thereby, the initial operation can be omitted and the game can be restarted quickly.

When it is possible to understand that the probability state is the high probability state, for example, the game control device 100.
From a power failure recovery command indicating that the power was restored to the state before the power failure occurred,
The case where the information indicating the high probability state is received as the information of the probability state can be mentioned. On the contrary, when the RAM initialization command is received, the probability state becomes the low probability state, so that the special initial operation is performed when the RAM initialization command is not present. In addition to the stochastic state, the game state may be a time saving state, an effect mode, a latent latency change state, or the like. Even for movable effect devices whose positions are different depending on these states, when the game state can be grasped, the initial operation including the special initial operation is not performed, and the movable effect device is retained at the position as it is. You may do it.

Further, not only the initial operation may not be performed depending on the gaming state, but the return priority may be changed depending on the gaming state. That is, an initial operation table according to the game state may be provided. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in a high probability state or a time saving state. In some cases, it is arranged at the operation completion position overlapping the front side of the display device 41, and is controlled so as to temporarily return to the initial position when the reach state develops. In addition, when it is not in the high probability state or the time saving state, it is arranged at the initial position, and when the reach state develops, it is controlled to temporarily move to the operation completion position. Since it may be placed at the operation completion position for a long time in this way, in each central movable effect member, a magnet is provided on the end surface facing the adjacent central movable effect member, and the attraction force of the magnet causes The central movable effect members are assisted in being maintained at the operation completion position.

If each of the central movable effect members is not in the initial position before the start of the initial operation, and if it is possible to understand that it is in the high probability state or the time saving state, the return priority is set to the lowest,
An initial action table in which an initial action according to the return priority is defined is selected. In this case, since each central movable effect member does not have to be in the initial position, there is no problem as it is, and it is better to prioritize the returning operation of other movable effect devices. The return priority of the central movable effect member should be the lowest.

In addition, if it is not possible to know that it is in a high-probability state or a time-saving state, or if it is understood that these states are not (normal probability state and neither time-saving state), the return priority should be the highest. The initial operation table in which the initial operation according to the return priority is defined is selected. In this case, each central movable effect member must be in the initial position, and since each central movable effect member is close to the display device 41 and covers a large area, it is necessary to prioritize the return operation. The return priority of each central movable effect member is set to be the highest.

Although the initial operation is always performed when the power is turned on, the initial operation may not be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when a power failure recovery command is received when the power is turned on, the power failure is normally recovered, so the movable effect device is assumed to have no problem and the initial operation is not performed, and the RAM initialization command is received when the power is turned on. Only the initial operation may be performed.

Further, when a power failure occurs and the power is restored during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variation display game restarted when the power failure is restored. Further, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variation display game which is newly started after the power failure is restored.
In this case, the initial operation may be performed regardless of the progress of the effect, or the initial operation may be performed corresponding to the progress of the effect. Further, all the initial operations may be performed in one special figure variation display game, or the initial operations may be dispersed over a plurality of special figure variation display games. In the case of performing the initial action in accordance with the progress of the effect, a specific effect including the operation of the movable effect device such that the operation as the initial operation can be executed as the effect of the special figure variation display game is set. To In addition, even if a power failure occurs and the power is restored during execution of the special figure variation display game, the initial operation is not performed only when the power is turned on, but the special figure variation display is performed after the power is turned on. When the game is executed, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variable display game.

Further, as a special initial action for the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial action, the movable effect device may be operated so as to join the normal initial action from the stopped position. Usually, the initial operation is an operation of returning from the initial position to the maximum operation position and then returning to the initial position. Therefore, the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation is in the state of being stopped during the process of performing the normal initial operation. Therefore, among the normal initial operations, the operations from the initial position to the position where the movable effect device is stopped may be omitted and the remaining operations may be performed.

Further, although the detection sensor can detect that the movable rendering device is at the initial position, it may be able to detect not only the initial position but also another specific position, and the entire operating range. It may be possible to detect at which position over the range, and the mode of the initial operation may be set according to the detected position. In addition, the normal detection state is the detection state when the movable performance device is in the initial position, but the detection state when the movable performance device is in the position where the movable performance device should be when the power is turned on may be the normal detection state. Does not necessarily have to be the initial position.

Although the initial operation of the board effect device 44 provided in the game board 30 has been described here, when a movable effect device is provided in the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15, this movable effect device is also applicable. is there. Further, the pachinko gaming machine has been described, but other gaming machines such as a slot machine can be applied as long as it has a movable effect device.

From the above, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the game that displays the identification information in a variable manner is executed,
A movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, first lower movable member 740, which performs a predetermined effect operation in a game machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result. 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 84.
8, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910
, Third central movable effect member 920, fourth central movable effect member 930) and position detecting means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 8) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device.
58, 889, 897) and an effect control unit (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control unit is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on. If the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is normally If it is not in the detection state, it is possible to replace the normal initial operation with the special initial operation by omitting a part of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, and position detecting means corresponding to each movable effect device is provided, and the effect control means is a movable effect in which the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is the normal detection state. A normal initial operation may be performed as an initial operation for the device, and a special initial operation may be performed instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation for the movable effect device whose detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state. It was made possible. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, the production control means, when all the detection results by the respective position detection means before the start of the initial operation are in the normal detection state, causes the plurality of movable production devices to perform the normal initial operation in a predetermined order, If at least one of the detection results by the position detection means before the start of the operation is not in the normal detection state, after the special initial operation is performed on the movable effect device whose detection result by the position detection means is not in the normal detection state, other movable movements are sequentially performed. This means that the effect device is initially operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience such as interference with another movable effect device by operating from the movable effect device which is not in a normal position. Further, by performing the special initial operation one by one, the operations can be confirmed one by one, and it becomes easy to grasp the abnormal state.

Further, the position detection means is capable of detecting that the movable effect device is at the initial position, and the state detecting that the movable effect device is at the initial position is a normal detection state, and the effect control means is
As the normal initial operation, the operation of returning from the initial position and then returning to the initial position is performed, and as the special initial operation, only the operation of returning to the initial position is performed. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, a game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is generated. In the machine, a plurality of movable effect devices for performing a predetermined effect operation, position detection means capable of detecting the position of each movable effect device, and effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable effect device,
The production control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable production device based on power-on, and if a plurality of detection results by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation are not in the normal detection state, This means that the movable effect devices whose detection results by the detection means are not in the normal detection state are operated one by one to be in the normal detection state. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

In addition, the display control device 41 includes a display device 41 for performing a performance display related to the game, and the performance control unit displays the movable performance devices that are not in the normal detection state when the position detection unit detects the movable production devices one by one in the normal detection state. The operation is performed according to a predetermined order so that the movable effect device close to the device 41 operates. Therefore, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation that hinders the visibility of the display. As a result, the timing at which the decorative special figure variation display game is visible on the display device 41 becomes earlier, and the restart of the game can be accelerated, and the timing at which the abnormality notification on the display device 41 is visible becomes earlier. Can be grasped quickly.

Further, the effect control means is predetermined so as not to interfere with other movable effect devices when the movable effect devices whose detection results by the position detecting means are not in the normal detection state are operated one by one to be in the normal detection state. The operations are performed according to the order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the operation interferes with another movable effect device.

In addition, the display control device 41 includes a display device 41 that displays an effect related to the game, and the effect control means can display a decorative variable display game in which the result mode is stopped and displayed after the plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the game are variably displayed. When operating the movable effect devices whose detection results detected by the position detection means are not in the normal detection state one by one, the movable effect device having a large range overlapping the display area of the decorative variable display game operates from the movable effect device. As described above, the operation is performed according to a predetermined order. Therefore, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation that hinders the visibility of the game.

In addition, the display control device 41 includes a display device 41 for performing an effect display related to the game, and the effect control unit displays the movable effect devices that are not in the normal detection state when the position detection unit detects the movable effect devices one by one in the normal detection state. This means that the movable effect device having a large overlapping range with the device 41 is operated according to a predetermined order. Therefore, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation that hinders the visibility of the display (decorative special figure variation display game, abnormality notification, etc.).

Next, an effect on the display device 41 will be described. First, the display on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 149(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping the display. In the upper left part of the display area,
A second decoration game display portion 88 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display section 88 is the same as the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special map variation display game display section 85, and is the left area, the middle area, and the right area. After the identification information is variably displayed, the display is stopped and the result is displayed.

Further, a memory display section 83 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The memory display unit 83 is provided with a first memory display unit 83a that displays the first startup memory and a second memory display unit 83b that displays the second startup memory. The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the first memory display section 83a corresponds to the first starting memory one-to-one,
They are displayed side by side in memory order, and here, it is shown that there are four first start memories. The decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory stored first, and is shifted to the left every time it is consumed.

Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to each starting memory and the pre-read result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In addition, the second storage display unit 83
In b, similar to the first memory display section 83a, a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory one-to-one is displayed. Here, it is shown that there are three second starting memories.

On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, there is provided an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start storage corresponding to the special figure variation display game that is currently being executed. This running memory display unit 8
4 shows the first memory display section 83a or the second memory display section 83b at the start of the special figure variation display game.
The decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the display shifts, and the result of the special figure changing display game to be executed, the change pattern, and the like are suggested by the display mode.

In the upper right part of the display area, there is provided a starting memory number display section 86 for displaying the starting memory number. The start memory number display unit 86 displays a first start memory number on the first start memory number display unit 86a.
And a second starting memory number display section 86b for displaying the number of second starting memories. In addition, an effect mode display unit 89 that displays the current effect mode is provided in the upper center of the display area. Here, it is shown that the mode is the time saving mode which is the mode in the time saving state. Further, in the time saving state, there is provided a remaining number display section 73 showing the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game which can be executed in the time saving state. The remaining number display unit 73 is one of the numerical value displays for displaying the game information whose numerical values change with the progress of the game by using numbers.

Next, the update of the numerical value display for displaying the game information whose numerical value changes with the progress of the game by the numeral will be described. In the game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses, the number of starting memory, the special figure variation display that can be executed in a time saving state, the remaining number of games, the special figure variation display that was executed regardless of a specific gaming state or gaming state Examples include the number of games. In addition, the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed before executing the special figure variation display game based on a specific starting memory, the time until the occurrence of a specific event, the points that can be acquired according to the game, and the number of game ball shots. , Number of prizes, number of prize balls, etc. Also, the number of rounds in the special game state, the number of condominiums that is the number of times the special result was continuously derived during the time saving state from the derivation of the special result in the state not in the time saving state, and the decoration during the execution of one special figure variation display game Examples include the number of times of re-variation in a so-called pseudo continuous pattern in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed in the special figure variation display game. Regarding the game information whose numerical value changes with the progress of these games, it is possible to display a numerical value display for displaying the numerical value on the display device 41.

In FIG. 149(a), the starting memory number display unit 86 displays the starting memory number by numerical display. In addition, the remaining number of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed by the remaining number display unit 7.
In 3, the numerical value is displayed. The numerical display on the remaining number display section 73 is composed of numerical information indicating a numerical value and additional information indicating the content of the numerical value. For example, in the remaining number display section 73 shown in FIG. Represents numerical information, and the "remaining" and "times" portions form additional information. The numerical information and the additional information differ in the layer in which each image is arranged when the VDP 312 composes the image, and when updating the numerical value, only the layer of the numerical information needs to be updated.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 149(b) to 149(j), the notice display unit 7 indicates the number of executions of the special figure variation display game until the special figure variation display game based on a specific starting memory is executed as the prefetch effect.
In 4, it can be displayed by numerical display. This numerical display is the game control device 100.
The numerical value will be set based on the prefetch command from.

As shown in FIG. 149(b), when a new second starting memory is generated during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and the second starting memory is to be the subject of advance notice, the advance notice display section 74 displays "4 more chances left." Is displayed. Here, a notice effect is also made in which the display mode of the start memory display corresponding to the target start memory on the second start memory number display unit 86b is changed. Notice display section 7
The display of 4 is also composed of numerical information indicating a numerical value (“4” in FIG. 149(b)) and additional information indicating the content of the numerical value (“after chance”, “times”).

As shown in FIG. 149(c), when the result is displayed and the special figure variation display game ends,
As shown in 49(d), a new special figure variation display game is started based on the second starting memory.
The decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 starts the variation display of the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas, and the second decoration game display section 88 also in the left area, the middle area, and the right area. The variable display of the identification information is started. Further, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display section 83b is displayed to flow into the running memory display section 84, and at the same time, the start memory number display section 86 which is one of the numerical values displays. The numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b is decreased by one.

At this time, it is made easy to understand that the numerical value of the second starting memory number display section 86b is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display is displayed larger in the numerical display to be updated than when it is not the update timing, but may be displayed larger than the other numerical displays. Further, at this stage, the display on the remaining number display unit 73 and the display on the advance notice display unit 74, which are other numerical display, are not updated.

When the update in the starting memory number display section 86, which is one of the numerical display, is completed, the display in the advance notice display section 74 is updated as shown in FIG. 149(e). At this time, it is made easy to understand that the notice display portion 74 is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the update on the notice display section 74, which is one of the numerical value displays, is completed, the display on the remaining number display section 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 149(f). At this time, it is made easy to understand that the remaining number display section 73 is enlarged and displayed to be updated. Even when updating these numerical displays, updating of other numerical displays is not performed at the same time.

After that, when executing the special figure variation display game based on two consecutive second starting memories, FIG.
The numerical value display is updated in the same manner as 49(d) to (f). Similarly, when starting the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory that is the subject of advance notice, as shown in FIG. 149(g), from the state in which the result of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed, FIG. As shown in (h), the starting memory number display section 86 and the memory display section 83 are updated. Here, the pre-reading effect is performed by changing the display mode on the storage display section 83, and the notice is also given on the running storage display section 84 according to the display mode.

When the update in the starting memory number display section 86 which is one of the numerical values display is completed, the display in the advance notice display section 74 is updated as shown in FIG. 149(i). Since the special figure variation display game in execution is the special figure variation display game for which a notice is given, the numerical value is 0, so the numerical value display is terminated, and only the notice display for the running special figure variation display game is displayed. To do. Further, when the update on the notice display section 74, which is one of the numerical display, is completed, the display on the remaining number display section 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 149(j).

In this way, when a plurality of numerical values are displayed on the display device 41, the respective update timings are made different, so that the player can easily understand the display update. In particular, FIG.
As shown in 49, when the triggers for updating a plurality of numerical values are the same trigger (here, the special figure variation display game starts), the respective update timings are made different, so that they are simultaneously updated. It is possible to easily grasp the update of the display that was originally used.

Note that in FIG. 149, the update timing is different for all the numerical displays,
Some of the numerical displays may be updated at the same time, and the numerical displays that the player wants to know about the update may not be updated at the same time. For example, the remaining number display section 73 and the notice display section 74 may be updated at the same time, but the starting memory number display section 86 may not be updated at the same time. Further, although the plurality of numerical value displays are not updated at the same time, the update start timing may be different. For example, after the update of one numerical value display is started, the update of another numerical value display may be started before the update is completed. That is, the update may be started sequentially.

Also, when multiple numerical displays with the same trigger for updating are sequentially updated, the numerical display waiting for the update is different from the actual numerical value, but since it is a short time, there is no problem. Although not provided, a display may be provided to prevent misidentification by the player. For example, a specific display may be added as a display indicating that the update is waiting, or the display mode of the numerical display may be different. In addition, for example, in the period until the updating of the numerical value display from FIGS. (d) to (f) is completed, the result of the previous decorative special figure variable display game is shaken on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85. Alternatively, it may be displayed and displayed in a variable manner after all the updates are completed.

Further, here, the case where the time saving state is described has been described as an example, but a plurality of numerical values can be displayed even when the time saving state is not set. When the time saving state is not set, the remaining number display section 73 is not displayed, but the notice display section 74 and the starting memory number display section 86 can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display numerical values for those whose numerical values change with the progress of other games.

FIG. 150 shows another display mode of the notice display unit 74. As shown in FIG. 150(a), when a new second starting memory is generated during execution of the special figure variation display game, and the second starting memory is the target of the notice, the time value is displayed on the notice display section 74. R. This time value is the time until the result is derived in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory that is the subject of advance notice, and here is 10
． It shows that it is 00 seconds. Numerical information indicating numerical values is also displayed on the notice display section 74 (
In FIG. 150(a), it is composed of "10" and "00") and additional information (":") indicating the contents of the numerical value.

At the start of the advance notice, the variation time of the special figure variation display game based on each starting memory is not determined, so the time value here is an approximate value, and the time value is appropriately modified according to the progress of the game. .. Since the effect control device 300 can grasp the variation time of the special figure variation display game based on the information of the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special figure variation display game, the time value is corrected based on this.

As shown in FIG. 150(b), the time value on the notice display portion 74 also decreases with the passage of time, and when the special figure variation display game is finished with the result displayed, as shown in FIG. 150(c). 2 A new special figure variation display game is started based on the starting memory. In addition, the variation display of the identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, and the second decoration game display section 88 also displays the left area, the middle area, and the right area. The variable display of the identification information is started in each case. Further, a display for displaying the decorative special figure starting memory at the left end of the second memory displaying section 83b is displayed to flow into the running memory displaying section 84, and at the same time, the starting memory number displaying section 8 which is one of the numerical value displays.
At 6, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b is decreased by one. At this time, it is made easy to understand that the numerical value of the second starting memory number display section 86b is enlarged and displayed. Further, during the period of updating the starting memory number display unit 86, the display of the remaining number display unit 73, which is another numerical value display, is not updated, and the update of the time value of the advance notice display unit 74 is stopped. It is said that

When the update in the starting memory number display section 86, which is one of the numerical values display, is completed, the display in the remaining number display section 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 150(d). At this time, it is made easy to understand that the remaining number display section 73 is enlarged and displayed to be updated. Even during the period in which the remaining number display section 73 is updated, the update of the time value in the advance notice display section 74 is stopped. Then, when the update on the remaining number display section 73 is completed, the notice display section 7 is displayed as shown in FIG.
The updating of the time value at 4 is restarted. At this time, the time value displayed in the state in which the update is stopped (8.65 seconds in FIG. 150(d)) is updated to a value obtained by subtracting the time of the period in which the update is stopped (FIG. 150). (E) is 7.56 seconds), and the update for subtracting the time value from this is started. While the time value of the notice display portion 74 is being updated, other numerical value displays are not updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 150(f), the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the notice target is derived by setting the time value of the notice display unit 74 to 0 seconds. Special results have been derived here. Note that here, the time value until the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the notice target is derived is shown in the notice display unit 74, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence or identification of the reach state may be performed. It is sufficient to display the time value until the occurrence of a specific event, such as the start timing of the effect.

Also in this example, when a plurality of numerical values are displayed on the display device 41, the respective update timings are made different so that the player can easily understand the display update. Although the notice display unit 74 is not updated during the update of the number of starting memory display unit 86 and the remaining number display unit 73, in this example, the number of starting memory display unit 86 and the remaining number display unit 73 are not updated. Since the update timing and the update interval are different when updating the time value of the display unit 74, it is difficult to confuse the two, and even when the start memory number display unit 86 and the remaining number display unit 73 are being updated, a notice is displayed. The part 74 may be updated.

In addition, when the numerical value of the remaining number display section 73 and the numerical value display of which the numerical value decreases due to the update, such as the numerical value of the notice display section 74, are displayed at the same time, the numerical value decreases due to which update trigger. Although it is difficult to determine whether or not it is, it is possible to prevent such a problem by changing the update timing as described above. The same applies when the numerical value is increased by updating any of the plurality of numerical values. In the above example, the display of the starting memory number display unit 86 in which the numerical value increases or decreases by updating is also included, but such a starting memory number display unit 86 is not displayed,
With respect to all the displayed numerical values, the numerical values of all the numerical displays may increase or the numerical values of all the numerical displays may decrease as the game progresses. If two numerical displays are displayed, one numerical display shall be updated to increase the numerical value, and the other numerical display shall be updated to decrease the numerical value. Can be identified.

Further, a sound may be emitted when updating the numerical display. In this case, the sound to be emitted may be different depending on the updated numerical value display. Further, the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 may be caused to emit light when updating the numerical display. In this case, the light emission mode may be changed depending on the updated numerical value display.

[Numerical display update processing]
FIG. 151 shows the numerical value display updating process performed in the effect display editing process (step C13) in the main process (see FIG. 119) in the effect control device 300. In the numerical value display update process, first, it is determined whether the numerical value display is being performed (step C521), and if the numerical value display is not being performed (step C521; N), the numerical value display updating process is ended. Also,
When the numerical value is displayed (step C521; Y), it is determined whether the numerical value of the game information for which the numerical value is displayed is updated (step C522).

If the numerical value has not been updated (step C522; N), the procedure moves to step C524. If the numerical value has been updated (step C522; Y), the update flag of the target numerical value display is set and it is determined whether there is a numerical value display being updated (step C524). At this point, the numerical value of the game information has been updated, but the corresponding numerical value display has not yet been updated.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a numerical value display being updated (step C524), and if there is a numerical value display being updated (step C524; Y), the numerical value display update processing is ended. That is, a plurality of numerical displays are not updated at the same time. If there is no numerical display being updated (step C524; N), the numerical display with the update flag, which has the highest priority, is updated (step C525), and the updated numerical display update flag is cleared. (Step C52
6) Then, the numerical value display update process ends.

The priority order may be set in advance for all of the numerical values that can be displayed, or may be set relatively among the numerical values being displayed. Further, the priority order may be changed as appropriate, for example, according to a change in the game state such as a time saving state or a high probability state, or the contents and results of the special figure variation display game being executed. Is possible.

FIG. 152 shows a display mode when the value of the remaining number display section 73 is low as an example of the display mode when the value of the numerical display is low. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is executed five times, and as shown in FIG. 152(b), the special figure variation display game ends and FIG. As shown in (c), when the next special figure variation display game is started, the starting memory number display section 86 is updated first.

When the remaining number display unit 73 is updated, the updated value is equal to or less than 4 which is the upper limit value of one of the starting memories, so that a display different from the display mode shown in FIGS. 149 and 150 is displayed. It is a mode. As shown in FIG. 152(d), the display mode at this time is displayed in the center side of the display area such that the remaining number display section 73 is farther from the starting memory number display section 86 than the display position up to that time. A frame line surrounding the remaining number display unit 73 is displayed so as to divide the area. The numerical values are updated in such a different display mode, and thereafter, the remaining number display section 73 is erased as shown in FIG. 152(e).

While the special figure variation display game is being executed, the remaining number display section 73 is not displayed, the special figure variation display game is ended as shown in FIG. 152(f), and the next special feature is displayed as shown in FIG. 152(g). When the figure variation display game is started and the update timing of the remaining number display section 73 is reached as shown in FIG. 152(h), the remaining number display section 73 is displayed and the numerical value is updated. After that, FIG. 152(j)
As shown in, the remaining number display section 73 is erased again. After that, the same display is performed when the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is executed once or twice.

As described above, by making the display mode different when the numerical value displayed on the numerical display is less than or equal to the upper limit value of the starting memory number, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the numerical value displayed on the numerical display with the starting memory number.
In particular, when the value of the numerical value display becomes less than or equal to the upper limit value of the number of starting memories, the numerical value display is not displayed except at the time of updating, whereby the confusion of the player can be effectively prevented.

In addition, although the display mode of the numerical display is made different with the numerical value of the numerical display being 4, which is the upper limit value of one of the starting memories, the sum of the upper limit values of the starting memories of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is added. The display mode of the numerical value display may be different at the boundary of the value being 8. In the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially executed, the game mainly progresses in the special figure 1 variable display game except in the time saving state, and the special figure in the time saving state. 2 The game progresses mainly in the variable display game. Therefore, since the upper limit value of the starting memory that the player is aware of is the upper limit value of one starting memory, the display mode of the numerical value display is made different with the upper limit value as a boundary. In the case of a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the order in which the starting memory occurs, the upper limit of the starting memory that the player is aware of is the upper limit of the starting memory of the special figures 1 and 2. Since the sum of the values is 8, it is preferable to change the display mode of the numerical value display at 8 in this case.

Further, since it is intended that the player does not confuse the numerical value displayed with the starting memory number, a display mode that prevents confusion when the numerical value is at least the upper limit value of the starting memory number. The boundary for changing the display mode may be a value larger than the upper limit value of the starting memory.

Further, the display mode is not limited to that shown in FIG. 152, and the display mode may be different before and after the numerical value of the numerical value display reaches a predetermined value. Examples of the different elements include a display position, a display size, a display color, a display angle, and the presence/absence of a frame line that divides the display area. Further, the target whose display mode is changed is not limited to the display on the remaining number display unit 73, and all numerical values may be displayed.

FIG. 153 shows another mode of numerical value display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 153(a), the remaining number display unit 73 is displayed imitating a time value. As shown in FIG. 153(b), the notice display section 74, which is a numerical display for displaying the time value until the occurrence of a specific event, is displayed so that the value is sequentially subtracted as time passes. If there is a difference between the displayed time value and the actual time value by determining the variable time of the special figure variable display game based on the starting memory, the actual time value should be set. Corrections may be made, in which case the time values may be discontinuous.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153(b), in the remaining number display section 73 which displays the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game which can be executed in the time saving state by the display imitating the time value, the numerical value in units of seconds is displayed. Displays the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in a short time.
The value in the unit of /100 seconds is designed to be changed for decoration. For example, 75:00
The display of 75:99 indicates that the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is executed 75 times. The display in units of 1/100 changes so as to sequentially increase, contrary to the display on the notice display unit 74, and at a timing at which the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is not updated 75:99. When it becomes, it will return to 75:00 next time.

In addition, at the timing of updating the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state, the value in seconds is subtracted. At this time, the display in units of 1/100 is succeeded as it is. For example, if it is the time to update the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state with the display of 75:02, then 74
: 03 is displayed. The unit of 1/100 may be reset to 00 so that it becomes 74:00.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game is the special result, the effect control for controlling the effect of the game in the gaming machine that produces a state advantageous to the player Means (production control device 300), and a display device 41 that is controlled by the production control device and can display game information that is information about a game, and the production control device is a plurality of numerical values that change as the game progresses. For each of the game information, it is possible to simultaneously display a numerical value display on the display device 41 by displaying a numerical value corresponding to the numerical value, and when updating one numerical value display, the other numerical value display is not updated. It will be. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the update of each numerical value display, the player's attention can be drawn, and the information can be surely grasped, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means is to make the update intervals of the numerical value display corresponding to the plurality of game information different from each other. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the update of each numerical value display.

In addition, the production control means will also display additional information that makes it possible to identify which game information the numerical display corresponds to. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand the contents of each numerical display.

In addition, the production control means, regarding the plurality of game information whose numerical display is displayed on the display device 41,
As the game progresses, all numerical display values are increased or all numerical display values are decreased. Therefore, it becomes easy to predict the change in each numerical display.

In addition, a performance control unit that controls the performance of the game in the gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, generates a state advantageous to the player. And a display device 41 capable of displaying game information that is information related to the game under the control of the effect control means, and the effect control means uses the numbers corresponding to the numerical values for the game information whose numerical values change as the game progresses. A numerical display for displaying can be displayed on the display device 41, and the display mode of the numerical display is made different when the numerical value reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, the display mode is changed, the player's attention can be drawn, and the information can be surely grasped, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a start storage means (game control device 100) that stores up to a predetermined upper limit the start memory that is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37). And the predetermined value is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. Therefore, the display mode is changed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent confusion between the numerical display and the start memory display.

Further, the effect control means can display the start memory display indicating the number of start memories on the display device 41, and the numerical display is not updated when the start memory display is updated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent confusion between the numerical display and the start memory display.

Further, the game information, the numerical value decreases as the game progresses, the effect control means continuously displays the numerical value display before the numerical value reaches the predetermined value, and when the numerical value is less than the predetermined value Numerical values will not be displayed continuously. Therefore, the display mode is changed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In particular, by setting the predetermined value to a value equal to or larger than the upper limit value of the starting memory, it is possible to prevent the numerical display from being confused with the starting memory display.

Next, a character effect of displaying a character display corresponding to a sound generated as a game effect will be described. In this character presentation, the speaker 19a, 19b emits a sound including dialogue, and
The display device 41 displays a character display 75 in which words are used as characters.

As shown in FIG. 154( a ), the display device 46 including LEDs is in a turned-off state before the reach state is displayed while the variable display is being performed in the decorative special figure variation display game.
Further, here, the display area is divided into two areas, a first display area 77 and a second display area 78. In the first display area, a variable display by the decoration special map variation display game display unit 85 is performed, and in the second display area 78, an effect indicating the degree of expectation is displayed as the effect corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game. It is being appreciated. By partitioning the display area in this way and performing different effects in the respective areas, various effects can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the period before variable display is performed in the decorative special figure variable display game and the reach state is reached, character effects as shown in FIGS. 154(b) to (d) can be executed. In this character presentation, the speaker 19a, 19b emits a voice saying "If you can do it, try it."
It is an effect that the character display 75 of "Try it if you can do it" is displayed. Further, the color of the character display 75 indicates a high degree of expectation as a special result, and indicates that the degree of expectation is higher in the order of blue, green, and red.

When the character effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 154(b), voices are output from the speakers 19a and 19b and a blue character display 75 is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 154(g), the panel decoration device 46 emits blue light in accordance with the blue character display 75. In the second display area 78, two stars are displayed to indicate the degree of expectation as the blue character effect is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154(c), the color of the character display 75 can be changed to green. When changing the color, a specific voice is output. Also, in FIG.
As shown in g), the board decoration device 46 emits green light in accordance with the green character display 75.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154(d), the color of the character display 75 can be changed to red. When changing the color, a specific voice is output. Further, as shown in FIG. 154(g), the panel decoration device 46 emits red light in accordance with the red character display 75. In the second display area 78, four stars are displayed along with the execution of the red character effect, suggesting that the degree of expectation has increased. The change in the color of the character display 75 depends on the suggested degree of expectation, and there are cases in which the color remains unchanged in blue and cases in which the color changes to green. Also, although it has been stated that a specific sound is output when the color of the character display 75 is changed, the same sound as the sound output at the start of the display of the character display 75 (here, "Do it if you can do it") should be emitted. May be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 154(e), the normal reach state is established. At this time the second
In the display area 78, five stars are displayed to indicate that the degree of expectation has increased. Then, from normal reach to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 154(f), character production is performed in the reach production. In the character effect during the reach effect, the speaker 19a, 19b emits the sound "I've come to here" and the character display 75 "I've come to here". Further, the color of the character display 75 indicates a high degree of expectation as a special result, and indicates that the degree of expectation is higher in the order of blue, green, and red. However, the light emission color of the panel decoration device 46 is white regardless of the color of the displayed characters as shown in FIG. 154(g).

Also, as shown in FIG. 154(f), the second display area 78 is erased and only the first display area 77 is left as the SP reach is developed. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed in the entire display area, the powerful effect can be performed in the large display area, and the interest in the SP reach, which is a state in which a special result is likely to occur, is effective. Can be increased.

Here, the display mode of the character display 75 in the character effect is made different depending on whether or not it is a period in the reach state. The character display 75 in the character effect in the period other than the reach state is the first display mode, in which the characters are arranged along a line that is not horizontal and are arranged so as not to follow the periphery of the display area. Further, it is displayed so as to overlap with the identification information which is displayed at a position near the center of the display area and is variably displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85. Furthermore, the character display is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the character 76. In addition, the size of the characters is not fixed but displayed three-dimensionally (three-dimensionally) so that some characters overlap. Also, the character string can be a plurality of strings.

On the other hand, the character display 75 in the character effect in the reach state forms the second display mode, in which the characters are arranged along the horizontal line and are arranged along the peripheral edge of the display area. Also,
It is displayed farther from the center of the display area than the character display 75 in the non-reach period. Further, the character display 75 is displayed so as not to overlap with the front side of the character 76. In addition, the size of the characters is fixed and displayed in a two-dimensional (two-dimensional) manner so that the characters do not overlap. Further, the characters are displayed in a smaller character than the character display 75 in the period not in the reach state. Also, the character string is a single string.

In the period not in the reach state, the character display is mainly used, so that the character display 75 has a conspicuous display mode in order to give the effect of the character display 75, and the interest of the game is improved. In particular, the period in which the player is not in the reach state is the period in which the player stays for the longest time to play the game. By increasing the interest of the production in the production in this period, it is possible to prevent the game from getting tired. Further, during the reach period, the character effect is executed as part of the reach effect such as the character image, and since the reach effect is the main component, the character display 7
The number 5 is set to be less noticeable than during the non-reach state so as not to disturb the reach production.

By changing the main body of the effect depending on whether or not the player is in the reach state, the effect becomes different and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Moreover, even if the same character effect is executed, the execution mode is changed depending on the execution timing, so that the variation of the character effect can be enriched and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In this way, when the display mode of the character display 75 in the character effect is changed depending on whether or not it is in the reach state, the image of the first display mode is prepared in advance for the character effect to be executed in a state other than the reach state. The character effect to be executed in can be realized by preparing an image in the second display mode. Further, regarding the character effect that is executed regardless of whether it is in the reach state, either the first display mode or the second display mode is selected and executed depending on the timing of execution.

The difference in the display mode of the character display 75 depending on whether it is the period in the reach state is not limited to the above-described one, and may have only a part of the above-described difference. In addition to the above differences, the font of characters may be different, or the number of characters that can be displayed may be different.

Further, whether or not to set the character information display area that distinguishes the area for displaying the character information from other display areas may be different depending on whether the period is the reach state or not. For example, when the reach state is not set, the text information display area is not set and the text information is directly overlapped with the background image. In the reach state, the text information display area is set and the text information is displayed in the text information display area. To do. For example, the character information display area is a black-painted area, and the character information is displayed in a color other than black so as to be displayed like a subtitle. Further, the character information display area may be displayed even when the reach state is not set, and the color of the character information display area may be different depending on whether the period is the reach state or the period in the reach state. The combination of the color of the character information display area and the color of the character information may be different depending on whether or not

Further, although the display mode is changed depending on whether it is the period in the reach state, the display mode may be changed depending on whether the character display 75 is the main, and the reference is not limited to the reach state. .. For example, the character display 75 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 154(b) to 154(d) during the normal reach period of the reach state and the normal reach period of the reach state, and FIG. The character display 75 may be displayed as described above. Further, the display mode of the character display 75 may be changed based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player. For example, even during the period in which the character display 75 as shown in FIG. 154(f) is performed, the effect button 25 and the touch panel 2 by the player are displayed.
In the case of the effect based on the operation of 9, the character display 75 as shown in FIGS. 154(b) to (d) is displayed.
The display mode may be temporarily changed.

The sounds emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b may be sounds that do not include dialogue, and the onomatopoeia of the sounds may be displayed as a character display. For example, a bell sound may be emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b to display "Karn" as a character display. Further, regarding the second display mode, it is possible not to suggest the degree of expectation by the color of the character and to have no advance notice function. That is, the display mode may be the first display mode when the notification function is provided and the second display mode when the notification function is not provided.

Further, the display mode of the character display 75 may be changed according to the game state such as the special game state, the high probability state, and the time saving state. Further, the display mode of the character display 75 may be changed depending on the effect mode selectable by the player and the effect mode selected by the game machine. Further, although the color of the character display 75 and the emission color of the board decoration device 46 can be synchronized, the emission color of the frame decoration device 18 may be synchronized.

Further, when the display area is limited to the first display area 77, the effect produced in the second display area 78 may be continuously performed in the first display area 77. Further, although the effect in the second display area 78 is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the special figure variation display game being executed, other effects may be used. For example, the prefetch effect may be performed together with the storage display unit 83. Further, the second decoration game display portion 88 may be displayed in the second display area 78. Further, although the first display area 77 and the second display area 78 are partitioned by the partition line, the partition line may not be displayed and a clear boundary may not be shown.

In addition, the display area is set to the first display area 77 during the non-reach period and the normal reach period.
The display area is divided into the second display area 78 and only the first display area 77 in the SP reach. However, the display area is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily set. For example,
During the period of temporary stop and re-variation in a so-called pseudo-continuous pattern in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed in the decorative special figure variation display game during execution of one special figure variation display game, only the first display area 77 is set, and other periods May be divided into a first display area 77 and a second display area 78. After the last temporary stop and re-variation in the pseudo continuous pattern is completed, the number of times the temporary stop and re-variation is executed may be displayed in the second display area.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is the special result, the gaming machine that produces a state advantageous to the player controls the effect of the game. It is provided with means (production control device 300) and display device 41 controlled by the production control device and capable of displaying the production related to the game, and the production control means can display the character information on the display device 41 as the production related to the game. Therefore, the display mode of the character information is changed depending on whether or not the reach state is set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the production various.

Further, the effect control means can display the character information along the non-horizontal line in the period not in the reach state, and display the character information along the horizontal line in the period in the reach state. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the production various. Further, when not in the reach state, the character information becomes conspicuous, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Furthermore, in the reach state, it is possible to prevent the reach production from being an obstacle.

In addition, speakers 19a and 19b capable of producing sound under the control of the effect control means.
The production control means can display the character corresponding to the sound emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b as the character information. Therefore, the content of the emitted sound can be easily grasped.

In addition, a performance control unit that controls the performance of the game in the gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, generates a state advantageous to the player. The production control means is provided with a display device 41 controlled by the production control means and capable of displaying the production related to the game, and a light emitting means (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46) controlled by the production control means and capable of emitting light. Can display the character information on the display device 41 as an effect related to the game, and can also cause the light emitting means to emit light, and the color of the character information and the light emitting color of the light emitting means are the same color in the period not in the reach state. In the reach state, the color of the character information and the emission color of the light emitting means are made different colors. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the production various.

In addition, speakers 19a and 19b capable of producing sound under the control of the effect control means.
The production control means is capable of changing the color of the character information displayed on the display device 41, and causes the speakers 19a and 19b to emit a sound in response to changing the color of the character information. It has been done. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the change in the color of the character information.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can resume the initial operation interrupted by the power failure after the power failure is restored.

In the gaming machine of this modification, the effect control device 300 is provided with a storage unit capable of holding the stored contents even in the case of a power failure. The storage means capable of holding the stored contents even in the event of a power failure may be constituted by a non-volatile RAM capable of holding the stored contents even if the power is not supplied, such as FeRAM323, or the stored contents without the supply of the electric power. Even if it is a volatile RAM 322 that cannot hold the game control device 10
As in the case of 0, the storage content may be retained even when a power failure occurs by supplying power from the backup power supply.

At least the information of the initial operation and the operation state of the movable effect device in the initial operation can be stored in the storage means capable of holding the stored content even during the power failure. When a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the interrupted initial operation can be resumed after the power failure is restored.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 155 is performed instead of the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 136. In this initial operation processing, it is first determined whether or not there is a power-on flag (step C121). In the gaming machine of the present modification, the effect control device 30 is performed based on the power-on of the gaming machine.
Processing for saving the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized, which is performed at 0 (step C7)
In, the power-on flag is set without setting the initial operation flag. That is,
The power-on flag is a flag set when the power is turned on. When this power-on flag is not present (step C121; N), the process proceeds to step C101. If the power-on flag is present (step C121; Y), it is determined whether the backup information is valid (step C122).

With respect to the storage means capable of holding the stored contents even in the case of power failure, processing is performed to judge whether the stored contents (backup information) when the power is turned on are valid.
As this determination method, similar to the processing in the game control device 100, there is a comparison of checksums at power-off and power-on. If the backup information is valid, the information stored in the RAM is used as it is. If the backup information is not valid, RA is used.
It is designed to initialize M. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a validity determination unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) is valid when the power is restored.

When the backup information is valid (step C122; Y), it is determined whether there is an initial operation executing flag (step C124). If there is an initial operation executing flag (step C124; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted. Since the information before the power failure is correctly stored in the storage means, this information is used as it is to restart the initial operation that was interrupted after the power failure is restored. If there is no initial operation executing flag (step C124; N), the initial operation flag is set (step C125). In this case, a power failure has occurred when the initial operation is not being executed, and the initial operation is performed based on the power-on this time.

On the other hand, when the backup information is not valid (step C122; N), the initial operation in-execution flag is cleared (step C123), and the initial operation flag is set (step C1).
25). In this case, since the information before the power failure occurred is not correctly stored in the storage means, the initial operation is restarted even if the power failure occurs during the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted. To do. When it is determined in the process of checking the validity of the backup information that the content is not valid, the storage content of the storage means is initialized. Therefore, the initialization clears the initial operation executing flag and the initial operation flag. May be set.

As backup information, the time when the power is turned off is stored based on the information of the RTC 338 so that the power-off time can be acquired by comparing with the time when the power is turned on. The interrupted initial operation can be restarted when the cutoff time is less than the predetermined time, and the initial operation is performed from the beginning when the power cutoff time is the predetermined time or more even if the backup information is valid. May be.

From the above, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the game that displays the identification information in a variable manner is executed,
A movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, first lower movable member 740, which performs a predetermined effect operation in a game machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result. 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 84.
8, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910
, A third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), an effect control unit (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and an effect control unit. Storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) capable of holding the above, and the effect control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device when the power is turned on, and information of the initial operation and the movable effect device in the initial operation. The operating state of can be stored in the storage means,
When a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the interrupted initial operation can be resumed after the power is restored. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, position detection means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, which can detect the position of the movable effect device,
782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897), and the effect control means determines whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is restored (effect control device 300). ), the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. If it is, perform the normal initial operation as the initial operation,
If the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, it is possible to replace the normal initial operation with the special initial operation by omitting a part of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. It has been done. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can set the initial operation according to the amount of movement required for the returning operation.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 156 is replaced with the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 136. In this initial operation processing, if there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C1
08; Y), that is, when the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131). The completion timing of the special initial operation is the timing when the detection sensor is in the normal detection state by the special initial operation of returning to the initial position. When the special initial operation is performed for a plurality of movable effect devices, it is the timing when the detection sensor of each movable effect device is in the normal detection state.

If it is not the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131; N), step C1
Move to 09. Further, when it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131;
Y) determines whether the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (step C132).
.. To detect the amount of movement, it is possible to use the number of steps required for the stepping motor that operates the movable rendering device to return the movable rendering device to the initial position. In addition to this, the movement amount may be detected based on the time required to return to the initial position.

If the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (step C132; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, there is a sufficient amount of movement in the return operation, and since the operation of the movable effect device can be confirmed by this return operation, the further initial operation of the movable effect device is omitted as in the first embodiment. If the amount of movement to the initial position is not equal to or more than the predetermined amount (step C132; N), the normal initial operation for the movable effect device is set (step C133). In this case, the amount of movement in the returning operation is not sufficient, and the normal initial operation of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

For example, when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not in the initial position, the process of step C106 sets the initial operation table of FIG. 146(b). .. Then, first, the special initial operation of the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is performed, and at the timing when the special initial operation is completed, it is determined whether the movement amount to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount. ..

If the amount of movement until returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 to the initial position is a predetermined amount or more, the initial operation table of FIG. 146(b) is used as it is. On the other hand, if the amount of movement until returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, the third in the execution order of FIG. 146(b) in the process of step C133. The initial operation in the above is changed to the operation for performing the normal initial operation in the entire group A.

Similarly, when the special initial operation is performed on the second lower movable member 770, it is determined whether the movement amount to the initial position is equal to or more than the predetermined amount at the timing when the special initial operation is completed. If the amount of movement until the second lower movable member 770 is returned to the initial position is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the initial operation table of FIG. 146(b) or the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930. The initial motion table changed by the special initial motion is used as it is. On the other hand, if the amount of movement until the second lower movable member 770 is returned to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, in the process of step C133, the fifth initial operation in the execution order of FIG. Change to one that normally performs initial operation.

When combined with the configuration of the first modified example described above, for a movable effect device whose detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, the movable effect device is in the normal detection state from the backup information. It is also possible to calculate the motion amount required up to and set whether or not to perform the normal initial motion according to the calculation result. In the first modification, at least the information of the initial operation and the operation state of the movable effect device in the initial operation can be stored, but the operation state of the movable effect device other than the initial operation can also be stored, and the movable effect device is normally used. It is also possible to be able to calculate the amount of movement required to reach the detection state.

[Initial operation processing]
When combining with the first modification in this way, the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 157 is performed instead of the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 156. The processing of steps C121 to C125 is the same as that of the first modification. Further, in this initial operation process, when all the states of the detection sensors are not the normal detection state (step C104; N), after setting the initial operation table for performing the special initial operation according to the detection state (step C106), the normal operation is performed normally. A process for setting whether to perform the initial operation is performed.

In this process, first, the movement amount from the backup information to the initial position is calculated for the movable effect device that performs the special initial operation (step C135). In addition, when a plurality of movable effect devices are not in the initial position, calculation is performed for each movable effect device. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a calculation unit that calculates the amount of movement required for the movable effect device to reach the normal detection state based on the information stored in the storage unit.

Next, it is determined whether all the movement amounts to the initial position are equal to or more than a predetermined amount (step C136).
). When all the movement amounts to the initial position are equal to or more than the predetermined amount (step C136; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. In this case, there is a sufficient amount of movement in the return operation, and since the operation of the movable effect device can be confirmed by this return operation, further initial operation of the movable effect device is omitted.

If all the movement amounts to the initial position are not more than the predetermined amount (step C136; N),
That is, if the amount of movement of at least one movable effect device to the initial position is not greater than or equal to the predetermined amount, change to an initial operation table that also performs a normal initial operation for the movable effect device with the amount of movement less than the predetermined amount (step C137). The process moves to step C107. In this case, there is a movable effect device in which the movement amount in the return operation is not sufficient, and the initial operation of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

For example, when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not in the initial position, the process of step C106 sets the initial operation table of FIG. 146(b). .. Then, the amount of movement required to return to the initial position calculated for each is a predetermined amount or more for the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and for the second lower movable member 770. If it is less than the predetermined amount, step C1
In the processing of 37, the fifth initial operation in the execution order of FIG. 146(b) is changed to the initial operation table which is set to perform the normal initial operation in the entire group C.

If the backup information is not valid, the amount of movement is unknown, but in this case the amount of movement to the initial position is considered to be less than the predetermined amount, and Also, the normal initial operation is performed after the return operation. Also, in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the processing of steps C110 to C112 in FIG. 136 is omitted, but it may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 136.

From the above, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the game that displays the identification information in a variable manner is executed,
A movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, first lower movable member 740, which performs a predetermined effect operation in a game machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result. 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 84.
8, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910
, Third central movable effect member 920, fourth central movable effect member 930) and position detecting means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 8) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device.
58, 889, 897) and an effect control unit (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control unit is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on. If the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is usually When it is not in the detection state, the movable effect device is operated until it becomes the normal detection state, and when the operation amount required until it becomes the normal detection state is a predetermined amount or more, the operation is set as the initial operation and the movable effect is made. If the operation amount required to reach the normal detection state is less than the predetermined amount without performing the normal initial operation for the device, the normal initial operation for the movable effect device is performed after the end of the operation. Becomes Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, the movable effect device is provided with a plurality of movable effect devices, each movable effect device is provided with position detection means, and the effect control means is a movable effect device in which the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is a normal detection state. Performs a normal initial operation as an initial operation. For a movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation, the movable effect device is operated until the normal detection state is reached, and the normal detection is performed. If the amount of movement required to reach the state is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the operation is set as the initial operation of the movable effect device and the normal initial operation is not performed for the movable effect device, and the normal detection state is set. When the required operation amount is less than the predetermined amount, it means that the normal initial operation is performed on the movable effect device after the end of the operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, the effect control means is a storage means (RAM 322, F that can retain the stored contents even in the event of a power failure).
eRAM 323), the operation state of the movable effect device can be stored in the storage means, and when the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, it can be moved based on the information stored in the storage means. The production device is provided with a calculation unit (production control device 300) that calculates the amount of motion required to reach the normal detection state, and when the amount of motion calculated by the calculation unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the normal detection state is set. Until the normal detection state is reached, when the operation amount calculated by the calculating means is less than the predetermined amount, the initial operation is normally not performed for the movable effect device. This means that the normal initial operation is performed after the movable effect device is operated. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is adapted to perform an initial operation on the basis of receiving control information from the game control means.

[Single-shot command processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. 158 is performed instead of the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. In this single-shot command processing, when it is determined that MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing (step C262) of rewriting internal information to model information corresponding to the command is performed. After that, the initial operation flag is set (step C141) and the power-on flag is cleared (step C1).
42) and terminates the single-shot command processing. The model designation command is a command which is always transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 first when the power of the game machine is turned on,
The control information when the power is turned on is transmitted from the game control device 100 based on the power being turned on.

In the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation flag is set by the process of saving the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized in the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine (step C7). No, only set here. Therefore, the initial operation is performed only when the model designation command is received. If the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command, the initial operation is not set in the initial operation process, and the initial operation is not performed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation flag is saved in the area to be initialized in the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine (step C7). A power-on flag indicating that the power has been turned on is set.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Also, instead of the received command analysis processing shown in FIG. 121, the received command analysis processing shown in FIG. 159 is performed. In this received command analysis processing, the return operation processing (step C150) is performed when a correct command is received.

[Return operation processing]
FIG. 160 shows a return operation process (step C150) in the above-described received command analysis process.
)showed that. In this restoration operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a power-on flag (step C151), and if there is no power-on flag (step C151; N), the restoration operation process ends. If there is a power-on flag (step C151; Y), the power-on flag is cleared (step C152), the state of the detection sensor is acquired (step C153),
It is determined whether all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C154). Then, when all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C154; Y), the return operation process is ended. Further, when all the detection sensors are not in the normal detection state (step C
154; N) sets the special initial operation (return operation) of the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state (step C155), and ends the return operation process.

As described above, the power-on flag is a flag that is set based on the power-on of the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine, and the effect control device 300 is the game control device 10 first.
It is cleared when the model designation command received from 0 is received. Also, when the model designation command is received, the initial operation flag is set and the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed.

However, if the production control device 300 misses the model designation command for some reason, the initial operation flag is not set and the power-on flag remains set. When a command other than the model designation command is received in such a situation, a returning operation of returning the movable effect device that is not at the initial position to the initial position is performed. As a result, when the model specification command is missed when the power is turned on, the initial operation is omitted and only the return operation is performed, and it is possible not to delay the time when the game can be started normally by the execution of the initial operation. It is possible to perform the returning operation so that the movable effect device is not in an abnormal position and does not affect the game.

The commands that trigger the return operation are all commands other than the model designation command, but they may be limited to specific commands and can be set arbitrarily. For example, only when the predetermined control information regarding the special figure variation display game is received, the return operation processing (step C150
) May be performed. The predetermined control information relating to the special figure variation display game includes a variation type command and a symbol type command which are commands transmitted at the start of the special figure variation display game.

By thus performing the returning operation at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special figure variation display game from being affected by the movable effect device being in the abnormal position.
That is, when the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial operation is not performed, and when the special figure variation display game is started in a state where the movable effect device is not at the initial position, the effect is movable. The effect device can be returned to the initial position so as not to affect the execution of the special figure variation display game.

In addition to this, as the predetermined control information regarding the special figure variation display game, a symbol stop command, a command regarding increase/decrease of the number of holdings, a command regarding the result of the prefetch processing of the holding, a big hit system command, etc. can be arbitrarily selected. .. Further, when only the return operation is performed without performing the initial operation, the initial operation may be performed based on the fact that the customer wait state is entered. By doing so, the initial operation can be performed without affecting the execution of the special figure variation display game.

Further, when the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial operation is not performed, and when the movable effect device is not at the initial position, when the command related to the special figure variation display game is received, In the special figure variation display game, the movable effect device or all movable effect devices may not be operated. In this case, when it is known that the special figure variation display game has ended, a return operation may be performed to return to the initial position so that the movable effect device can be operated from the next special figure variation display game. To know that the special figure variation display game has ended is, for example, when a symbol stop command for the special figure variation display game is received, or when a command regarding the start of the next special figure variation display game is received. ..

From the above, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the game that displays the identification information in a variable manner is executed,
A game control means (game control device 100) for integrally controlling a game in a game machine that generates a special game state that gives a predetermined game value to a player when the result of the game is a special result. , A movable effect device that performs a predetermined effect operation (first lower movable member 740, 741, second
Lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 8
60, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device (first. 1st-7th detection sensor 781,782,811,812,858,889,897
) And production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable production device on the basis of the control information from the game control means, the production control means being transmitted from the game control means on the basis of power-on. It is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the control information when the power is turned on, and when the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is the predetermined normal detection state, the initial operation is performed. Performing a normal initial operation, and if the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted as the initial operation. That is what is possible. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, if the effect control means does not receive the power-on control information transmitted from the game control means based on the power-on, it means that the initial operation of the movable effect device is not performed. Therefore, when the start timing of the initial operation is missed, the time until the game can be started can be shortened by not performing the initial operation.

Further, the effect control means is configured to perform the operation of returning the movable effect device to the initial position when receiving the predetermined control information regarding the game from the game control means. Therefore, when the initial operation is omitted and the game is started, the movable effect device that is not in the normal position can be returned to the initial position.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the movable accessory device can operate in a wider operating range than the operating range in the game.

As shown in FIG. 161, the second lower movable member 770 is adapted to move from the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 161(b) in the effect of the game. In the effect, it rotates in the range of FIG. 161(a) to FIG. 161(b).

In the gaming machine of this modification, the second lower movable member 770 is changed from the state of FIG. 161(b) to that of FIG.
It is possible to rotate to the maximum operation position shown in 61(c), and the actual rotatable range of the second lower movable member 770 is the range of FIGS. 161(a) to 161(c). That is, the operation range in the game effect is narrower than the operable range. Note that FIG.
The range from (b) to (c) is not rotatable simply because there is play in the structure, but can be rotatably operated by the effect control device 300 by controlling the motor 734. It is a range. In this example, the fact that the maximum operating position has been reached means that the second light shielding plate 773
Can be detected by retreating from the detection unit of the second detection sensor 782 and changing the detection state from OFF to ON.

In the normal initial operation of the second lower movable member 770, from the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a),
After operating up to the maximum operating position shown in FIG. 161(c), the operation of returning to the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a) is performed. By doing so, the operation in the operation range in the game effect can be surely guaranteed by the initial operation.

Although the second lower movable member 770 is shown here, the operation range of the other movable effect devices in the game effect is similarly narrower than the operable range, and the initial operation is performed up to the maximum operation position. You can However, in the case of a configuration in which the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are operated at the same time to the maximum operation position, the interference occurs. Sets the order of operations in the initial operation so as not to interfere with each other.

Further, when the special initial operation is performed when the detection result by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), first, the operation is opposite to the direction of returning to the initial position. 161(c), and after operating up to the maximum operating position shown in FIG.
It may be returned to the initial position shown in a). In addition, the operation to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161(c) in the initial operation is performed only in the special initial operation, and in the case of the normal initial operation, it is performed in the range of FIG. 161(a) to (b). Is also good.

Further, when the detection result by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), the special initial operation for returning to the initial position is performed. In case that it takes some time to return to the initial position due to some trouble, it is equipped with measuring means to measure the time to return to the initial position, and if the measurement result is longer than the predetermined time, then the maximum operating position You may make it work up to. The predetermined time referred to here is the time required to return from the maximum operating position to the initial position, and if it is longer than this time, it is considered that there is a problem such as the movable effect device being caught, so the initial time After returning to the position, move to the maximum operating position and check the operation. Further, in this case, even when the movable effect device is slowly operated so as to reach the maximum operating position over a time longer than the predetermined time when operating to the maximum operating position after returning to the initial position. good. It should be noted that the present invention is also applicable to the above-described first embodiment and other modifications in which the operation range in the game effect and the operation range in the initial operation match.

From the above, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the game that displays the identification information in a variable manner is executed,
A movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, first lower movable member 740, which performs a predetermined effect operation in a game machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result. 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 84.
8, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910
, A third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the movable effect device is used in the game effect. It is possible to operate in a range wider than the operation range, and the effect control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, and the operation range of the movable effect device in the initial operation is set to the movable value in the game effect. It is possible to make it wider than the operating range of the effect device. Therefore, by making the operation range of the movable effect device in the initial operation wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the game effect, it is possible to reliably ensure the operation in the operation range in the game effect.

In addition, position detection means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, which can detect the position of the movable effect device,
782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897), and if the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not the predetermined detection state, it is wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the effect of the game. This means that the initial operation can be performed within the operation range. Therefore, when the movable effect device is in an abnormal state, it can be confirmed that the operation in the operation range in the game effect is possible, and the operation in the operation range in the game effect can be reliably guaranteed.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines using the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

Further, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Gaming machine 18 Frame decoration device (light emitting means)
41 display device 46 panel decoration device (light emitting means)
300 production control device (production control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, creates a state advantageous to the player.
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
A display device that is controlled by the effect control means and can display effects related to the game,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light under the control of the effect control means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to display character information on the display device as an effect related to the game, and it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light,
A game machine characterized in that a color of the character information and a color of light emitted by the light emitting means are different from each other during a reach state.